I was asked to do a talk for the Association of Shrewsbury Railway Modellers in November 2025. These are the notes and images pulled together for that talk. In many cases, the images included have been used in other articles and rather than creating new image files a link to the original image has been provided in these notes. ………
The featured image above is a view of the NCB-built engine shed near Granville Colliery. After the NCB took over the collieries owned by the Lilleshall Company, Granville Colliery supplied coal to Buildwas Power Station and the coal trains were worked by a range of locos down the 1.5 miles to Donnington. Granville Colliery had a decent sized shed and in later years used Austerity 0-6-0ST tanks but in Lilleshall Company days the bigger engines were the ex-TVR and Barry railway engines. This image and the accompanying text were shared by Marcus Keane on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 15th September 2015. [38]
The Lilleshall Company
Sir John Leveson became Earl Gower in 1746. His son Granville Leveson Gower became the second Earl in 1754. They owned limestone quarries and coal mines in Shropshire and had significant land holdings across the country.
Granville Leveson Gower was elected to Parliament in 1744. With the death of his elder brother in 1746, he became known by the courtesy title of Viscount Trentham until he succeeded his father as Earl Gower in 1754. He built the earlier Lilleshall Hall, converting a 17th-century house located in the village of Lilleshall into a country residence around the late 1750s. [1]
He remained active in politics until his retirement later in 1794. In 1786, he was created Marquess of Stafford as a reward for his services. He dies in 1803. [1] He took an active interest in the efficient running of his local estates, including those at Sherrifhales, Lilleshall, Donnington Wood, St Georges, Priorslee, Wombridge and Snedshill. [2]
The second Earl’s brother-in-law was Francis, 3rd Duke of Bridgewater, who was the originator of the Bridgewater Canal which carried coal out of his mines in the Manchester area. Earl Gower was introduced to the brothers Thomas and John Gilbert John Gilbert was instrumental in the construction of the Bridgewater Canal. Along with the Gilbert brothers, the second Earl formed the Lilleshall Partnership in 1764. Initially, it focused on improving the extraction and supply of lime for use in agriculture and as a flux in iron-making. [2]
The Earl had a vested interest in producing and delivering limestone as cheaply as possible. The Lilleshall Partnership recognised that a better communication system was required between its widely dispersed sites and in 1765 began the construction of a 5.5 mile long canal. It ran from the Earl’s holdings in Donnington Wood to wharves at Pave Lane and was known as the Donnington Wood Tug Boat Canal.
Large scale iron making began in the parish of Lilleshall in 1785 when a blast furnace was operating at Donnington Wood. The works was started by William Reynolds and Joseph Rathbone. By 1802 there were two furnaces and a third was added in that year.
By 1802, the partnership and its associated companies were dissolved and replaced by The Lilleshall Company which over time developed interests in mechanical engineering, coal mining, iron and steel making and brickworks. The company was noted for its winding, pumping and blast engines and operated a private railway network. It also constructed railway locomotives from 1862 to 1888. [2]
In 1880, the Lilleshall Company became a Public company. After the Second World War its mines were nationalised as was the Lilleshall Iron and Steel Co under the Iron and Steel Act but then denationalised in 1954 and sold back to Lilleshall Company. The company’s railways were closed in 1969. [2]
The Mines
The Friends of Granville Country Park tell us that the Lilleshall Company “sank its first deep mine at Waxhill Barracks in 1818 and another the Freehold pit, at about the same time. The Muxton Bridge pit was opened by 1840. There were over 400 acres of coalpits and waste tips in the area in the 1840s. Their production was running at some 100,000 tons of coal a year with 50,000 tons of iron ore. ” [2]
Map of Muxton Bridge, Waxhill Barracks and Barnyard Collieries. This image was shared by Brian Edwards on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 29th September 2022. It shows the rail network prior to the installation of the cutoff line, Granville Colliery sits off the bottom of this image, (c) Unknown. [14]
Granville Colliery
“By 1860, the Granville pit had been sunk and sinking of the Grange (originally the Albert and Alexander) pit began in 1864. Grange Colliery, Granville Colliery, The Muxton Bridge, Woodhouse and Stafford Collieries were known as the Deepside Mines.” [2]
Granville Colliery was nationalised after the Second World War. It remained under National Coal Board control until closure in 1979. At the time of closure it was employing 560 people. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Sharon Bradburn on 10th July 2018, (c) Unknown. [4]
“From the late 19th century, coal mining gradually declined. The Waxhill barracks colliery ceased production in 1900 and Muxton Bridge soon after. The Freehold colliery closed in 1928 and only the Grange and Granville collieries survived until nationalisation in 1947. In 1951 the two were connected underground and from 1952 the Grange served mainly to ventilate the Granville. In 1979 the Granville colliery, which employed 560 men, was closed. It was the last coal mine in Shropshire.” [2]
Bob Yate tells us that, “The most prolific of the collieries, [Granville Colliery] supplied the LNWR, GWR and Cambrian Railways with locomotive coal, and latterly also to Ironbridge ‘B’ Power Station. In 1896, there were 177 underground and 67 surface workers. Later the pit had a fairly consistent workforce of around 300 men, but after the closure of the nearby Kemberton colliery in 1967, this grew to 900 men, but shrank again to around 600 in the early 1970s. Meanwhile, the annual output had grown from around 300-350,000 tons to 600,000 tons in the late 1960s.” [25: p16]
An early photograph of Granville Pit, taken from the West in around 1900. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Ray Robinson on 20th May 2024, (c) Unknown. [6]
This extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1881/1882 shows the full length of the Mineral Railway branch from the East side of the map extracts above which show Old Lodge Furnaces. It is worth noting the loop which allowed locomotives to run round their trains just to the West of the Colliery site. [26]
An extract from the ERSI satellite imagery provided by the National Library of Scotland. The two lanes which appear on the map extract above can easily be seen on this satellite image. The line of the old Mineral Railway is also easy to make out. Nothing remains of the old colliery buildings. [27]
A similar extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1901/1902. In 20 years some changes have occurred. The more southerly of the two colliery buildings has been enlarged and the new tramway/tramroad has been provided onto the spoil heap North of the standard-gauge mineral railway terminus, [28]
This map extract comes from the 1925/1927 edition of the 25″ Ordnance Survey. The screens have been built and some modifications to the internal tramway layout have occurred. [19]
The Colliery site on the 1:10,000 Ordnance Survey published in 1954. The tramway to the spoil heap has been relocated and the buildings on site have been altered. [30]
The colliery site on the 1:10,000 Ordnance Survey published in 1967. A complete refurbishment of the buildings above ground has taken place. The screens building is different and the area to the East of the railway has seen significant reconstruction. An internal tramway can now be seen to the South and East of the standard gauge line. [31]
This extract from the same Ordnance Survey sheet of 1967 shows the wider area close to Granville Colliery and the rationalisation which had by then taken place. The line North off this extract heads for the site of Muxtonbridge Colliery where trains to the Donnington Sidings would once have reversed. The line leaving the extract to the West runs on to the rest of the Lilleshall Company’s network. [31]
By 1970, this was the layout of the lines between the mainline at Donnington and the Colliery. This hand-drawn image appears in Bob Yate’s book. [25: p119]
Having looked at maps showing the Granville Colliery site at different points in its history, some photographs will help us better to envisage the site.
The picture referred to by Cliff Hewitt in his notes above. The image was shared by Cliff Hewitt on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 1st October 2017. [44]
What appears to be a train of empties at the screens at Granville Colliery. [11]
The same location but after the rail link was severed. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Linda Howard on 9th March 2014. [18]
A view of the screens from behind. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by John Wood on 30th January 2015. [43]
Granville Colliery had its own 2ft 3in narrow gauge railway/tramway underground and close to the main shafts, battery powered locomotives were used below ground. …
Under the head gear at Granville Colliery. Coal was lifted up the shaft and run off to left to what appears to be a tippler. From there the coal went down to the screens. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 1st March 2014 by Marcus Keane. [20]
The same lines seen from the opposite direction and from above. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 1st March 2014 by Marcus Keane. [21]
Two of the tubs/wagons used underground are seen in this image which was shared by John Wood on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 30th January 2015. [23]
Underground, there was an extensive network of 2ft 3in gauge lines which were initially served by horse power but which were later to see a number of dedicated battery-powered locomotives in use.
The underground workshop/garage at Granville Colliery in 1958. Granville had three English Electric battery locos and the garage had battery charging benches on either side of the rails. This image was shared by Cliff Hewitt on 22nd November 2015 on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group. [24]
Granville Colliery had English Electric battery locos, picture is of the loco garage with the 3.3kv battery chargers to the left of frame switchgear to the right & a loco in the background ready for a battery change. This image was shared by Cliff Hewitt as a comment under a post by Ray Pascal, dated 18th November 2015, on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group. [24]
A loco battery changeout. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 18th November 2015 by Cliff Hewitt. [24]
Old Lodge Furnaces
In 1824 the company commissioned two new blast furnaces. They were named the Old Lodge furnaces because of their proximity to the site of an old hunting lodge which was demolished in 1820. In March 1825 the Lilleshall Company paid the Coalbrookdale Company £2,392 for the works. George Roden, a stonemason from the Nabb, was paid £425 in 1825 and just over £777 in 1826 for erecting loading ramps and the retaining walls. In 1830 the Donnington Wood and the Old Lodge ironworks together produced 15,110 tons. A third furnace was added in 1846 and two more in 1859. New blast beam engines, manufactured by the Lilleshall Company, were installed in 1862 and the height of the furnaces was increased from 50 to 71 feet at about the same time.
Limestone came, via the canal, from the Lilleshall quarries and the coal (coke) and iron stone from the local pits via an extensive system of tramways, some of which, were later converted to standard gauge railways.
The Old Lodge Furnaces produced cold-blast pig iron of the finest quality, but eventually it could not compete with cheaper iron made elsewhere and in 1888 the last of the Old Lodge furnaces was blown out. The furnaces were demolished in 1905 by Thomas Molineaux Jnr, including a tall chimney 140 feet high by 13 feet diameter, known locally as “The Lodge Stack”. In 1956 the stone was reused for St Mathew’s Church. Thereafter the company concentrated all its iron and steel making at Priorslee.
An artist’s impression of what the Old Lodge Furnaces site would have looked like in its heyday. The view is from the Northeast. The canal arm which served the furnaces can be seen entering the sketch from the bottom-right (the North). The image is a little misleading as it shows narrow-boats on the canal when in fact tub-boats would have been used. The tub-boats would have been drawn by horses. The rails shown as a schematic representation of the rails on the site throughout its history and show an engine shed on the North end of the fun of furnaces. [My photograph, 27th July 2023]
This map extract is taken from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1881/1882. The canal arm enters from the top of the extract and railways/tramways are shown in preponderance, with the furnaces themselves in a row running North-South just above the centre of the extract. The line running off the extract to the East heads towards Granville Colliery. The line running off the extract to the South runs to Dawes Bower and Grange Colliery. Of the lines exiting the extract to the West, one, running Northwest (at the top corner of the lower image) is the old tramway link to Lubstree Wharf. There are also two lines leaving the bottom-left corner of the lower image, the lower line runs towards collieries/shafts local to the furnaces and is probably a tramway at a higher level than the upper of the two lines which is in cutting and is the connection from Old Lodge Furnaces into the wider Mineral Railway network belonging to the Lilleshall Company. [46]
This extract from RailMapOnline.com’s satellite imagery shows the area of the furnaces in the 21st century, a little more of the area immediately to the North than appears on the OS map extract above and less on the East-West axis. The turquoise lines are symbolic representations of the tramway network which preceded the mineral railway which is represented by the purple lines. The two tramway routes leading North out of this and the map extract served, from the left: Meadow Colliery (which appears in the first map extract below); Barn Colliery; Waxhill Barracks and Barracks Colliery; and Muxton Bridge Colliery. (That line, from Muxton Bridge Colliery to the site of Old Lodge Furnaces is illustrated on the map extracts which follow the one covering Meadow Colliery). [47]
A view of Old Lodge Furnaces from the East. [4] (This image was first produced in the ‘London Trade Exchange’ of 2nd January 1875. Some of the tramways are visible, as are the coke ovens in the distance, and the engine house on the right, although the engraver has omitted the chimney beside the engine house.) [25: p11]
The site of the furnaces became the main marshalling are for coal wagons from a number of the collieries, but particularly Granville Colliery
The Lilleshall Company Tramway and Railway Networks
A significant network of tramways and later railways served the Lilleshall Company’s interests in East Shropshire.
Bob Yate provides a sketch of the whole of the Lilleshall Company’s network of railways. This extract from the sketch map shows the length of their railways between the Humber Arm and Granville Colliery. The locations shown on this extract are: 3. Old Lodge Furnaces; 8. The Humber Arm Railway; 9. Lubstree Wharf; 10. The Donnington (LNWR) exchange sidings and the Midland Ironworks; 13. Lodge Trip; 19. Granville Colliery; 20. Barn Pits Colliery; 21. Waxhill Barracks Colliery; 22. Muxton Bridge Colliery; 23. Freehold Colliery; and 24. Shepherd Slag Crushing Plant. Yaye does not record Meadow Colliery which was close to the Donnington Wood Canal to the Southwest of Muxton Bridge Colliery and apparently tramway served until its closure. [2: p38]
The northernmost point on the network of tramways/tramroads was a wharf on the Humber Arm of the Newport Branch of the Shropshire Union Canal. That short branch canal ran from Kynnersley to Lubstree close to The Humbers, a hamlet located to the North of the old LNWR mainline through Donnington and on the North side of Venning Barracks, the present base of the 11th Signal Brigade and Headquarters West Midlands, part of the British Army’s 3rd UK Division. The early tramroad North of the old LNWR line was later replaced by a standard-gauge line. The length of tramroad to the South of the LNWR line was eventually abandoned in favour of a standard gauge line to the East.
Approximately the same area as shown on the map extract above, as it appears on the RailMapOnline.com satellite imagery. The purple lines are the approximate line of the Mineral Railway that replaced the tramway we will following first. Satellite imagery shows nothing of the Canal Arm to the North of this image. Heading to the North from here, the line of the canal traverses open fields and then Aqueduct plantation. The trees in the plantation obscure any direct evidence of the old canal arm from above and, similarly, the location of its junction with the Shropshire Union Canal Newport Branch. Significant work has taken place at this location to convert derelict buildings to housing. [47]
The modern home created from the goods shed at Lubstree. [48]
As shown on Yate’s sketch plan above, the line ran South towards the LNWR main line, passing under it by means of the bridge. The LNWR line has been replaced by the A518.
This extract from the 1882 25″ Ordnance Survey shows the point at which the LNWR bridged the Lilleshall Company’s tramway/railway. It also shows the old tramway route continuing to the South-southeast and the later standard-gauge mineral railway curving round to the Northeast to run parallel to the LNWR main line. [49]
This RailMapOnline satellite image shows the features noted on map extract above and shows the dramatic changes which have occurred in the immediate vicinity of the old tramway. The tramway route is not followed by RailMapOnline South-southeast of Wellington Road. It runs Southeast towards Old Lodge Furnaces. [47]
After passing under the LNWR main line, the Lilleshall Company’s Mineral Railway turned Northeast to run alongside the LNWR for a short distance.
This map extract shows the mineral railway curving away from the LNWR mainline. There were exchange sidings at this location and lines which accessed a Timber Yard and the Midland Ironworks, both on the East side of the LNWR mainline. [50]
On the curve on Donnington Sidings looking East. This is the same train as shown on the next picture. This image was shared by Carole Anne Huselbee on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 14th September 2014. [51]
Donnington Sidings looking Northwest. A rake of empties setting off for Granville Colliery behind an 0-6-0ST locomotive. Wellington Road Crossing is a short distance ahead of the locomotive. This photograph was shared by Carole Anne Huselbee on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 5th October 2014. [52]
This next extract from the 25″Ordnance Survey of 1882 shows the mineral railway heading Southeast and crossing, first, what is now Wellington Road, and then running parallel to the modern Donnington Wood Way and crossing School Road. [49]
The route of the old mineral railway runs parallel to Donnington Wood Way, approximately on the line of the footpath shown on this Google Maps extract. The red flag marker highlights its route. [Google Maps, July 2023]
A closer view of the point where the mineral railway crossed the old Wellington Road. The photograph below shows a locomotive approaching the level-crossing from the Southeast. [47]
Wellington Road Crossing. The photograph below shows a locomotive entering the level-crossing from the Southeast. This picture was shared by Carole Anne Huselbee on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 5th October 2014. [53]This crossing was located at what was called the Coal Wharf on the old Wellington Road just over & up from the now Ladbrokes Bookies. The line ran from the pit and approached it via what is now a footpath between “The Fields” (a lane to the houses at the bottom of bell rec.) and Donnington Wood Way then across the first gated crossing at the bottom of School Road and on past the end of what is now Van Beeks Motor Spares to the second crossing. The road was wide so gates with supporting heavy caster type wheels allowed them to open seperately. The photograph shows NCB loco No 10 crossing the main Telford to Newport road (A518) at Donnington in 1975 with a trip working from Granville Colliery to the exchange sidings which were just the other side of the road. The MGR hopper wagons would then be moved by a Class 47 to Ironbridge, with run rounds at both Wellington and Madeley Junction. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Peter Bushell on 21st August 2023, The gates in this image are now in use by Telford Steam Railway. (c) Unknown. [7]
Possibly the same locomotive, definitely at the same location as the image above. This image was shared by Phil Neal on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 8th August 2017, (c) Unknown. [12]
Locomotive No. 10 (a Hunslet 0-6-0 ) waiting with its train to cross Wellington Road. This photo was shared by Lin Keska on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 2nd May 2017. [54]
Another view of the School Road Crossing. This photo was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Carole Anne Huselbee on 8th September 2014. [57]
An 0-6-0ST pulls a train of empties back from Donnington to Lodge and Granville Colliery. It is seen here crossing School Road. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by Jim Walton on 16th August 2023, (c) Unknown. [13]
From the School Road Crossing the line ran Southeast. Its route is now a public footpath separated from the modern Donnington Wood Way by a hedgeline.
Somewhere Southeast of School Road on 8th September 1969, this view looks Northwest and shows NCB Loco No. 8 hauling empty hopper wagons towards Granville Colliery. This image was shared on Telford Memories Facebook Group by Carole Anne Huselbee on 14th September 2014. [58]
Heading up hill from Donnington towards the Lodge and Granville Colliery. [11]
An 0-6-0ST (possibly No.8) pulls is train of hopper wagons up the direct route from Coal Wharf (Donnington) to Granville Pit (not going via the location of Muxton Bridge Pit) .This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 10th March 2020 by John Wood. [36]NCB 0-6-0ST No. 8 taking a train of empty hoppers up the line from Donnington. This appears to have been taken on the cutoff link avoiding the need for reversing at Muxonbridge Colliery. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by John Wood on 20th March 2020. [8]This photograph shows ‘The Colonel’, an 0-6-0ST, running down to the Sidings at Donnington. The image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Clive Sanbrook on 27th March 2020. [32]
A later locomotive crossing the same road. This image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Carole Anne Huselbee on 15th September 2014. [35]
Having climbed up from the exchange sidings trains of empties entered the area of what was once Old Lodge Furnaces.
By 1970, this was the layout of the lines between the mainline at Donnington and the Colliery. This hand-drawn image appears in Bob Yate’s book. [25: p119]
Granville Colliery’s Diesel Loco (NCB No. 2D?) hauling a rake of empty coal hopper wagons on the lines to the West of Granville Colliery. This photo was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Carole Anne Huselbee on 5th October 2014. [33]
The original engine shed. This building was demolished and the NCB built a replacement some distance away. It looks in a poor condition. The loco on the left looks like the 0-6-0 Barclay tank No 11 or one of the large ex Taff Vale locos. The one on the right is an unidentified Saddle Tank. This image was sent to me by David Clarke the author of a book about Telford’s railways, (c) Unknown. [37]
A view of the NCB-built engine shed noted in the image above. After the NCB took over the collieries owned by the Company, Granville Colliery supplied coal to Buildwas Power Station and the coal trains were worked by a range of locos down the 1.5 miles to Donnington. Granville Colliery had a decent sized shed and in later years used Austerity 0-6-0ST tanks but in Lilleshall Company days the bigger engines were the ex-TVR and Barry railway engines. This image and the accompanying text were shared by Marcus Keane on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 15th September 2015. [38]Possibly locomotive No. 8 on shed. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by John Wood on 20th March 2020. [8]
This view from a location on the spoil heap to the South of the last image shows the later engine shed, built by the NCB, and two locomotives in steam marshalling wagons. The wagons closest to the camera appear to be empties which will probably be pushed towards the colliery screens which are a distance off to the right of this image. The photograph was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Paul Wheeler on 25th May 2018. [34]
The ‘Colonel’, with a train of full wagons having left Granville Colliery and about to marshall its train for onward movement to Donnington Sidings. [11]
‘The Colonel‘ again! ‘The Colonel‘ was named after Colonel Harrison, Chairman of Harrison’s Grove Colliery. He was also Chairman of Cannock & Rugeley Colliery. After a spell at Area Central Workshops – May 1960 to June 1961, ‘The Colonel‘ went back to Grove Colliery then to Coppice Colliery at Heath Hayes for a few months in 1963 before transfer to Granville Colliery in November 1963. This image was shared on the Telford memories Facebook Group by Metsa Vaim EdOrg on 24th October 2020. [41]
Towards the end of steam, this loco is bringing its train South from the Depot towards the location of the engine shed which is off the picture to the left beyond the stored coal. The locomotive is ‘Granville No. 5‘. This image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 15th February 2017 by Lin Keska. [40]
This photograph was taken at a similar location to those above. At the centre of the image is the weighbridge. Granville Colliery itself can be made out on the horizon. The image was shared by John Wood on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group on 30th January 2015. [42]
The Lilleshall network continued to the West and Southwest of Granville Colliery and Lodge Sidings. These next photographs cover the length of the line through Oakengates to Hollingworth Sidings and Stafford and Dark Lane Collieries.
The dotted lines on this sketch map are private railways. The Lilleshall Company’s main line runs from Granville and Grange Collieries in the top-right of the sketch map via Old Lodge Ironworks and Priorslee Furnaces down to Hollinswood. This sketch map was included on the Miner’s Walk website which provides information about the local area. [10]
Grange Colliery, close to Granville Colliery operated independently at first and along with Granville Colliery survived to be nationalised in 1947. In 1951, the two were connected underground and from 1952 Grange Colliery served mainly to ventilate Granville Colliery. [2]
The monochrome photographs included here were taken by a number of different photographers. Where possible permission has been sought to include those photographs in this article. Particularly, there are a significant number of photographs taken by A.J.B. Dodd which appear here which were first found on various Facebook Groups. A number were supplied direct by Mike Dodd, A.J.B. Dodd’s son, who curates the photographs taken by his father. Particular thanks are expressed to Mike Dodd for entering into email correspondence about all of these photographs and for his generous permission to use them in this article. [59]
Grange Colliery as it appears on the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1901, published in 1902. The railway lines shown in the immediate area of the shafts and slag heaps were internal lines unconnected to the wider Lilleshall Company network. A single line ran to Dawes Bower where transshipment to the standard gauge Lilleshall Company network took place. [60]
The same area as shown on the OS map extract above. This image comes from Google Maps. What appears to be a caravan park on the site of the old colliery is Telford Naturist Club. The buildings to the top-right of the image are the Cottage Boarding Kennels and Cattery. [Google Maps, September 2025]
This extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1901 shows the point where the branch-line to Grange Colliery met the main Lilleshall line. The line from Grange Colliery enters bottom-right. At the top-right of this extract two sets of lines are shown. The upper lines run towards Donnington sidings, the lower lines connect to Granville Colliery. The lines leaving the top of the extract are local lines serving the area immediately around what were Old Lodge Furnaces. The line leaving the west (left) edge of the extract is the Lilleshall Company mainline to Priorslee and Hollinswood. As can be seen at the centre of the extract, a loco bringing wagons from Grange Colliery would need to cross the mainline before reversing its wagons onto the mainline and, depending on its destination, then head for Donnington or Hollinswood. The sidings shown on this extract were also used for storing wagons before onward transit to their ultimate destination. [61]
A short distance to the West of the sidings at Lodge, a line running North from Donnington Wood Brick and Tile Works met the Lilleshall Company’s main line at a triangular junction. [62]
Donnington Wood Brick & Tile Works were conveniently sited next to reserves of Clay. The Works had their own internal railway with a Self-acting Inclined Plane. [63]
Donnington Wood Brick & Tile Works seen from the air, from the Northeast. This image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Marcus Keane on 27th March 2019. [64]
A much closer view of the circular Hoffman Kiln taken in 1966. This image was shared by Marcus Keane on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 23rd September 2017. [65]
The location of the Donnington Wood Brick and Tile Works plotted on modern satellite imagery from Google Maps. Properties on Cloisters Way sit directly over the site of the Hoffman Kiln. [Google Maps, December 2023]
West along the main line from the short branch to Donnington Wood Brickworks there were sidings adjacent to Rookery Road. I have not been able to find them on any maps.
This extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey shows the Lilleshall Mainline running South West from the junction which served the Donnington Wood Brick & Tile Works and covers the approximate location of the Rookery Road Sidings. [66]
This view looks East towards the triangular junction serving Donnington Wood Brick Works, (c) A. J. B. Dodd. [59]An 0-6-0ST Saddle Tank participating in track removal at Rookery Road Sidings. This image was shared on the Granville Colliery Facebook Group by John Wood on 28th June 2020, (c) A. J. B. Dodd. [9]
I believe this photograph was taken from a point close to the bridge over Gower Street. It looks East and shows Rookery Road Sidings in the distance, (c) A. J. B. Dodd. [59]
Moss Road/Gower Street Railway Bridge before demolition. This is a photo of a photo which was behind glass, hence the glare. It was shared by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on the Oakengates History Group including surrounding areas Facebook Group on 17th July 2018. [68]
The junction for New Yard Engineering Works was adjacent to Wrockwardine Villa. The engine shed is visible bottom-centre of the extract. One of two bridges which crossed the Lilleshall Company’s Railway appears towards the bottom-left of the image. I believe that this was known as the ‘Tin Bridge’. [69]
A very similar area to that covered on the map extract above. The image comes, again, from RailMapOnline.com’s satellite imagery. Wrockwardine Villa is centre-top in this image. [47]
New Yard Engineering Works. … Gower Street runs North-South on the right of the map extract New Works buildings faced East onto the road. The locomotive shed can be seen to the top-left of the image. The workshops which stood alongside it were not built by the time of the Ordnance Survey (1901). [72]
Sketch Railway Plan/Map of New Yard Engineering Works, Gower Street, St Georges showing the layout in 1959. The workshops adjacent to the Engine Shed are shown, top-left. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 1st April 2023 by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley. [73]
A aerial postcard image of New Yard Engineering Works, the camera is to the Southeast of the Works and as a result shows, at the top-right, the Engine Shed and Workshop. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on 17th February 2019. [74]
The Lilleshall Company mainline curves to the South through the area known as ‘The Nabb’. Two bridges are shown. The one just visible top-right is the ‘Tin Bridge. Prior to the construction of the standard gauge mineral railway a horse-drawn tramway ran North-South through this location, running down the side of the terraced housing adjacent to the bridge. The second bridge appears bottom-left. It was a more substantial structure. [75]
The Tin Bridge again with Diamond Row above and to the right. This photograph was taken during the Lilleshall Company’s last run on their Mineral line, with the Engine ‘Alberta’ in 1959. The Photo was taken by the late Edgar Meeson, cousin of Frank Meeson. The image was shared in the Oakengates History Group and surrounding areas Facebook Group by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on 27th January 2021. [78]
This is the second of the two bridges which crossed the Lilleshall Main Line in ‘The Nabb’.The picture looks to the Southwest and comes from the Howard Williams Collection and was shared on the Oakengates History Group including surrounding areas Facebook Group on 27th February 2014 by Frank Meeson. [79]
From this location the Lilleshall Company’s line curved round to the South and crossed Station Hill, Oakengates.
Station Hill, Oakengates at the turn of the 20th century. This postcard view looks West across the Lilleshall Company’s line down the hill towards the centre of Oakengates. The crossing keeper’s beehive hut is visible to the left of the road. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 24th October 2018 by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley. [81]
Two further images of the Station Hill Crossing. …
Looking South across Station Hill. The beehive keeper’s hut stands across the road from the camera. This image was shared by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 16th May 2021. [82]
The line crossed Station Hill in Oakengates on the level with the old canal running beneath the road. Looking West from the crossing, train crews would have had a glimpse of Oakengates (Market) Railway Station on the LNWR/LMS/BR Coalport Branch. The station appears on the left of this map extract. [83]
South of Station Hill the line ran at a high level above sidings which served Snedshill Ironworks. The next few images are relatively grainy as they are enlargements from aerial images from 1948. …
The Lilleshall main line runs across the top of the first of these images and behind the house at the top-right of the image. Wagons sit in the sidings associated with Snedshill Ironworks. [84]
On the South side of Canongate, Snedshill Ironworks dominates this map extract. The Shrewsbury to Birmingham main line can be seen entering a tunnel at the bottom-left of this image. Towards the left edge of the extract, the LNWR Coalport Branch runs in cutting crossed by a number of footbridges/access bridges. The Works sidings on the West of the Works terminate on the site, whereas those to the East of the building run off the bottom of the extract to make a junction with the Coalport Branch. The old canal was in use as a reservoir alongside the Works and the Lilleshall Company’s mainline runs alongside that reservoir to its East. [87]
Two further extracts from Image No. EAW013746 taken in 1948 looking East, which show the mineral railway running South passing the Snedshill Ironworks (at the bottom of the first image).
The darker area above the Ironworks is a remaining length of canal with a retaining wall immediately beyond which supports the Lilleshall Company’s main line. [85]
The Lilleshall Company’s main line is on the right side of this image. Canongate can be seen at the top of the image with the reservoir which was once a length of the Shropshire Canal to the South of Canongate alongside the Lilleshall main line. Snedshill Ironworks sidings pass under Canongate and run towards the bottom-left of the image. [86]
Another extract from an aerial image which was taken shortly after those above. The wagons on this image are in the same location as those on the image above. This extract from EAW013752 on the Britain From Above website looks over Snedshill Ironworks (bottom-left), with the short length of canal behind them, towards Priorslee. The Lilleshall Company’s mainline enters just below centre-left and runs at an angle towards the top-right of the image. The Greyhound bridge on the old A5 is alongside the level crossing which took the mineral railway across the A5. The Greyhound bridge took the A5 over the LNWR Coalport Branch (in deep cutting) and a feeder line from/to the sidings at the Snedshill Ironworks which met the Coalport Branch just beyond the bridge. [88]
Lines from Snedshill Ironworks join the Coalport Branch in passing under what became the A5 a little to the South of the Works themselves. The Lilleshall Company mainline crosses the road at level. A short branch runs off towards the Snedshill Brickworks. The GWR line from Shrewsbury to Wolverhampton runs in tunnel from top to bottom of the map extract. [90]
In the 21st century the area covered by the 25″ OS Map extract above has changed considerably. Only the GWR mainline from Shrewsbury to Wolverhampton remains of the lines on the OS Map extract. On this satellite image it is represented by the turquoise line and is running in tunnel. The Greyhound Roundabout has replaced what was the A5 (B5061 in 21st century) bridge over the Coalport Branch. The level crossing shown below, is long gone. The Lilleshall Company buildings have been replaced by Wickes and Aldi! The A442 dual carriageway dominates the area. [47]
This photograph looks across the roof of the Snedshill Brick and Tile Works towards Priorslee Furnaces. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 24th November 2015 by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley. [92]
Priorslee Furnaces and Steel Works in 1901. The Lilleshall Company’s main line runs diagonally across this map extract from the top-left corner to the bottom-right corner. [93]
Priorslee Furnaces viewed from the Southeast. This image was shared by Paul Wheeler on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 28th November 2017. [94]
An aerial image of the extensive steelworks and slag reduction plant at Priorslee. The blast furnaces were decommissioned in 1958 and the internal system closed. This image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group by Lin Keska on 22nd February 2017. [95]
This postcard view of Priorslee Furnaces was taken in 1899. The rail access to the plant is emphasised by the locomotive and wagons in the foreground. The image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Lin Keska on 27th June 2020. [96]
Two Lilleshall Company locomotives (Peckett 0-4-0ST No.10 and 0-6-2T No. 3 which was once GWR No. 589) in attendance at the demolition of a 98ft high concrete coal bunker at Priorslee Furnaces circa 1936. This work was taking place as part of the demolition of the former steelworks site. The image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley (courtesy of John Wood) on 1st December 2019. I understand that the original image is held in the Archives of the Ironbridge Gorge Museum Trust. [97]
This extract from the 1882 25″ Ordnance Survey shows the area immediately Southeast of Priorslee Furnaces The Lilleshall Company’s main line split in three directions – to the South it runs into Hollinswood Sidings and up to Hollinswood Junction, where it joins the GWR mainline, Southeast it continues towards Stafford Colliery, and Northeast towards Woodhouse and Lawn Collieries. [98]
The remaining length of the Lilleshall Company’s mainline served Stafford Colliery (passing Darklane Colliery on its way East. This extract is taken from the 1901 25″ Ordnance Survey. Hollinswood Junction on the GWR mainline between Shrewsbury and Wolverhampton just sneaks into the bottom-left corner of this map extract. [99]
Hollinswood Sidings and Hollinswood Junction, to the South of Priorslee Furnaces and Steelworks. The GWR line between Shrewsbury and Wolverhampton runs from the top-left to the bottom-right. The LNWR Coalport Branch enters top-left and leaves the map extract to the left of centre at the bottom of the image. The line turning off the GWR mainline to the South served a series industrial undertakings to the East of the old Shropshire Canal. The Lilleshall Company’s sidings enter the map extract centre-top and meet the GWR mainline at Hollinswood Junction. [100]
This is another area of Telford which has seen dramatic change. The GWR line ‘turquoise’ remains, the LNWR Coalport branch (thicker purple) has long gone. As have all the Lilleshall Company’s lines (thinner purple). The M54, the A442, Queensway and Hollinswood Interchange dominate the modern image. [47]
Locomotive 48516 heading what seems to be a train of empty coal wagons and facing towards Wolverhampton. Hollinswood Sidings can be seen beyond the locomotive. The image was shared on the Telford Memories Facebook Group by Lin Keska on 4th April 2018. [101]
Lilleshall Company Locomotives
The Lilleshall Company operated a number of steam engines which it picked up from various sources and some of which it built itself. The remainder of this article is no more than a glimpse of these locomotives on the Lilleshall Company’s network. The authoritative treatment of the motive power on the Lilleshall Company network is the book by Bob Yate, “The Railways and Locos of the Lilleshall Company.” [25]
Yate tells us that, because the Lilleshall Company’s network was extensive, it needed a considerable number of locomotives to operate it. He continues: “Much of the traffic was heavy, so it comes as no surprise to find that the company turned to acquiring former main line company locomotives for some of their more arduous duties. The total number of locomotives rose from four during the mid-1850s to eight by 1870, down to five by 1875, then six by 1886, increasing to nine in 1900 until 1920 when there were eleven. By the 1930s the number was back down to nine.” [25: p67] After WW2, numbers were reduced to five, and once closure was approaching all five were scrapped and two other locomotives were purchased.
Peckett 0-4-0ST, Lilleshall Locomotive No. 10 at Priorslee, (c) Industrial Railway Society, Ken Cooper collection. This photograph was shared by Andy Rose on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 29th September 2019. [103]
Former Barry Railway ‘B1’ Class 0-6-2T No. 60 (also ex-GWR No. 251) which when purchased by the Lilleshall Company was given No. 5, photographer not known. This photograph was shared by Andy Rose on the Telford Memories Facebook Group on 29th September 2019. [103]
Lilleshall Company No. 9, an 0-6-0ST locomotive built by Robert Stephenson & Co. Ltd. It was bought by the Lilleshall Company in 1904 and lasted until 1929, (c) F. Jones Collection. This photograph was shared by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 27th November 2017. [104]
Lilleshall built 0-4-0ST, Constance and Andrew Barclay 0-6-0T No. 11 at New Yard Locomotive Shed. The image was shared on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group by Gwyn Thunderwing Hartley on 4th April 2021. [105]
Lilleshall Company Locomotive No. 12, (ex-GWR No. 2794) 0-6-0PT sits a New Yard. This photograph was shared by John Wood on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 28th June 2020. [107]
Lilleshall Company Locomotive, Prince of Wales (ex-Lever Brothers, Port Sunlight Railway) 0-4-0ST also sits a New Yard This photograph was also shared by John Wood on the Oakengates History Group Facebook Group on 29th March 2018. [107]
National Coal Board Locomotives
With nationalisation, the NCB took over Granville and Grange pits and continued to use the northern length of the Lilleshall Network until closure of Granville Colliery in 1979. Granville Colliery supplied coal to Buildwas Power Station and the coal trains were worked by a range of locos down the 1.5 miles to Donnington. Austerity 0-6-0ST steam locomotives were the most common form of motive power until steam was replaced by diesel locomotives.
Between 1948 and 1964, 77 new “Austerity” 0-6-0ST locomotives were built for the NCB.
NCB Hunslet Austerity 0-6-0ST Granville No. 5 at School Road Crossing. [108]
When steam was replaced by diesel, the NCB deployed Hunslet 0-6-0DH locos at Granville Colliery. Between 1965 and 1989 well over 50 0-6-0DH shunters were built by Hunslet (Leeds) for the British market. More were also built to a variety of gauges for users abroad in South America, Africa, Europe and the Indian subcontinent. The Hunslet 0-6-0DHs were surprisingly powerful for their size, and their short wheelbase enabled them to operate in locations where other locomotives may struggle. [109]
Typical NCB Hunslet 0-6-0DH locomotives. [110]
Models of the Hunslet 0-6-0DH are produced in OO gauge by Revolution Trains and in N gauge by the N Gauge Society.
CAD 3/4 image of Hunslet 0-6-0DH in 00 Gauge. [110]
What can be seen today?
All of the Granville Colliery buildings have been removed.
All that remains of the Old Lodge furnaces after extensive dismantling and site restoration involving raising of the ground levels are parts of the brickwork of the first three furnaces.
The high walls behind the furnaces are the remains of the furnace loading ramps. On the right of the ramp walls hidden in the trees is a retaining wall in front which was the blowing house. Behind the loading ramps were calcining kilns which were added in 1870 to improve the quality of the iron ore. Remains of the Lodge Furnaces, Tug Boat Canal and other buildings can be seen around Granville Country Park.
The Lilleshall Company Railways have disappeared completely.
G. F. R. Barker; Leveson-Gower, Granville (1721-1803); in Sydney Lee, (ed.); Dictionary of National Biography. Vol. 33; Smith Elder & Co., London, 1893.
The Jim Clemens Collection No. 2 – Steaming Through Shropshire Part 1; B&R Videos; and can be seen on Facebook at https://www.facebook.com/groups/265906436919058/search/?q=locomotive&locale=en_GB. B & R Video Productions produce a series of DVDs which have primarily been created by converting cine-film. One part of their library is the Jim Clemens Collection. These stills from the video are shared here with permission from Michael Clemens who holds the copyright on his father’s work. Michael is an author in his own right and maintains a website: https://www.michaelclemensrailways.co.uk. On that website there are details of all of the books he as published together with quite a bit of downloadable material including working timetables. His most relevant publication to this current article is: Michael Clemens; The Last Years of Steam in Shropshire and the Severn Valley; Fonthill Media Ltd, Stroud, Gloucestershire, 2017. That book contains two photographs which are similar to two of the images shown above (p67).
Many of the photographs taken by A.J.B. Dodd which appear in this article were first found on various Facebook Groups. A number were supplied direct by Mike Dodd, A.J.B. Dodd’s son who curates the photographs taken by his father. Particular thanks are expressed to Mike Dodd for entering into email correspondence about all of these photographs and for his generous permission to use them in this article.
On 27th September 2025 we marked the bicentenary of the Stockton & Darlington Railway which is accepted the world over as one of the most significant developments in the history of railways, the precursor of all that was to follow in the development of railway networks throughout the world. That day, Locomotion No. 1 (a replica appears in the featured image above) pulled a long train along the Stockton and Darlington Railway. …………
The logo for the series of events across the country to mark this significant anniversary. [46]
Andrew Wilson, writing in 2002, said that the Stockton & Darlington Railway (S&DR) “was incorporated in 1821. With the line from Stockton to Shildon opening on 27th September 1825. The S&DR became the world’s first steam-operated railway, although passenger services were initially horse-drawn; regular steam-powered passenger services commenced in 1833. In 1843 the line was extended to Bishop Auckland, and Barnard Castle was reached in 1856. Additional lines were soon planned, and one of these the South Durham & Lancashire Union Railway sought to link Bishop Auckland and Tebay so that coke from the Durham coalfields could be easily moved to the Furness ironworks, and iron-ore moved back to Cleveland.” [1: p13]
The Institution of Civil Engineers says that “The Stockton and Darlington Railway (S&DR) was the first passenger railway to use steam trains to transport passengers.” [4] The Company started operations at the end of September 1825 and was eventually taken over by the North Eastern Railway in 1863 when “it consisted of 200 route miles (320km) and around 160 locomotives.” [4]
Network Rail says: “On 27th September 1825, the world’s first passenger train, hauled by George Stephenson’s Locomotion No.1, carried more than 400 people along the Stockton and Darlington Railway. The landmark event drew crowds of up to 40,000 people and marked the birth of modern passenger train travel.” [46]
Darren Caplan, chief executive of trade body the Railway Industry Association, said: “It is hard to overstate the benefits that the railway has brought, and continues to bring, not just to the UK, but also globally, since 1825. Rail networks don’t just keep people connected, they also play a crucial role in spurring economic growth, creating jobs, boosting sustainability, and bringing together local communities.” [46]
The Encyclopedia Brittanica speaks of the S&DR as “first railway in the world to operate freight and passenger services with steam traction.” [6]
The Friends of the Stockton & Darlington Railway say that the S&DR “demonstrated to the wider world that such a railway could be a technical and financial success. The S&DR made possible the railways that were to follow such as the Liverpool & Manchester Railway. … It was therefore the birthplace of the modern railways that we know today.” [5]
Asked, ‘What’s so special about the S&DR?’ Neil Hammond, the Chair of the Friends of the Stockton & Darlington Railway, said, “We would argue that it’s the railway that got the world on track.” [7]
J. S. Jeans, writing in 1875, somewhat effusively called the S&DR, “the greatest idea of modern times.” [9] (His book appears in the adjacent image.)
According to Hammond, the S&DR, for the first time, brought together various elements of engineering and ideas for what a railway could be, which gave the rest of the world a blueprint for how to build a recognisably modern railway. Anthony Coulls of the National Railway Museum said that, “It set the DNA for the railway system.” [7]
From the outset, it was much more than just a way of conveying coal, unlike many of the other early railways. Transport of other goods and regular passenger services were intrinsic to its operation and purpose. “It used a combination of horses, stationary steam engines and steam-powered locomotives to pull wagons along its 26 miles, from the coalfields of County Durham to the port on the River Tees at Stockton, via the then-village of Shildon and market town of Darlington. Signalling systems, timetables and the idea of stations were all developed by the S&DR.” [7]
“While there had been earlier wooden waggonways, metal plateways and the use of steam engines, it was the coming together of engineering excellence with the motivation, vision and financial backing, mainly from Darlington’s Quaker families, in particular Edward Pease, which made the S&DR a significant milestone in the creation of what we now think of as the modern railway system. It required business people to recognise the potential role of the railway for communities and businesses beyond the mineral industries and to invest in a service that anyone (the public) could buy into and make use of. In return, unlike earlier mineral waggonways, the rail infrastructure would be a permanent fixture with a regular service linking populated areas and so attract additional businesses and industries resulting in population growth and movement. … By 1830, the S&DR was already a network of main and branch lines and had demonstrated to others building railways elsewhere in the UK and abroad, the model of a permanent, profitable steam powered public railway.” [8]
Coulls said that “Engineers travelled from across Britain and the world to see the the railway in action, to replicate its successes and learn from its mistakes. Bigger railways, such as the Manchester to Liverpool line, followed soon after and within a decade there was a global ‘railway mania’, akin to the rapid development and impact of the internet in the 20th Century.” [7]
He continued: “The S&DR was not the first railway and it was rapidly eclipsed. But it proved the practicality of the steam locomotive pulling trains over long distances.” [7]
There have been quite a number of detractors over the years and questions have been raised about the true place of the S&DR in railway history. As Coulls said, “it was not the first railway and it was rapidly eclipsed.” [7]
What we do know is that at least 400 people (maybe 600) travelled by train on the Stockton and Darlington Railway on 27th September 1825 and we know that around 40,000 people turned up to witness the event. [46] What is it that makes that event remarkable enough to be seen as the moment that the modern railway was born?
Lets first, make sure that we have understood the story on the Stockton & Darlington Railway Company: …
A Short History of the Stockton & Darlington Railway
Coal Reserves in Co. Durham
Coalfields in the United Kingdom in the 19th century. [103]
The Durham Coalfield is continuous with the Northumberland Coalfield to its North. It extends from Bishop Auckland in the South to the boundary with the county of Northumberland along the River Tyne in the North, beyond which is the Northumberland Coalfield. [106]
The two contiguous coalfield areas were often referred to as the Durham and Northumberland Coalfield(s) or as the Great Northern Coalfield. [108]
Three major ‘measures’ of Coal exist(ed) in the Durham Coalfield:
A closer focus on the Durham Coalfield: from a pamphlet printed by the National Coal Board in the 1950s, courtesy of ‘Mining History UK’, www.mhuk.org.uk. [106]Early Collieries tended to be sited as close as possible to major rivers. This is true of the Durham Coalfield – along both the Tyne and the Wear. The Tees appears bottom-right in this sketch map and was outside the extent of the Durham coalfield. [104]The Durham Coalfield: showing the mining areas developed before 1800. Proximity to river courses was paramount in keeping transport costs as low as possible. It is noticeable again that the River Tees and Stockton and Darlington were well outside the coalfield to the South. [104]This drawing highlights the extended areas of coal mining in 1800-1825 and 1825-1850. The areas concerned remain significantly to the North of the River Tees (and, indeed, Darlington and Stockton). [104]A cross-section of the Coalfield looking North. [104]
THe UK was the first country to develop its coal resources to any appreciable extent. The Durham Coalfield was among the first to be worked. The initiative came largely from the Bishops of Durham. The accounts of the See of Durham between 1274-1345 include a reference to the profits of the Bishop’s coalmines. By the middle of the fourteenth century mining had become well established at Whickham and Gateshead on the south side of the Tyne. “In 1366-1367 coal from Winlaton was bought by Edward III for the works at Windsor Castle. Coalpits were also in operation at Ferryhill, Hett and Lanchester before 1350. However, the cheapness of transport enjoyed by the pits close to the rivers gave them a big advantage and even at the beginning of the seventeenth century, almost all the large collieries were along the Tyne. Development of the Wear valley reserves led to the increasing importance of Sunderland as an exporting port, and by the time of the Civil War, the town had become, next to Newcastle, the biggest centre of the trade in the British Isles. The growth in the trade from the Tyne was phenomenal. In the year ended at Michaelmas, 1564, almost 33,000 tons of coal were shipped from Newcastle: in 1685, the tonnage was 616,000 almost 19 times as much.” [106]
Development of the industry in South Durham did not lag much behind the rest of the County. “As far back as the fourteenth century, part of the Bishopric of Durham south of Bishop Auckland was being successfully worked for coal. The Upper Wear Valley between Durham City and Bishop Auckland was in the Middle Ages the most populous part of the county because of the lead mines in the district. The coal consumed came from small workings sprinkled all through the valley and J. U. Nef, in his book ‘The Rise of the British Coal Industry’, estimates that by the middle of the seventeenth century there must have been twenty or thirty pits within an area of about 150 square miles. Every manor of any size had its own pits.” [106]
In more recent times, production from the Durham coal mines increased from about 26 million tons in 1877 to the highest recorded figure of almost 56 million tons in 1913. Just after the 1st World War there were 170,000 miners at work in the Durham coalfields. Since then, however, production has declined significantly. By the late 20th century production, with the closure of mines during the middle years of the century, production fell rapidly. The last mine in the Durham Coalfield closed in 1994. [107] The last in the Northumberland Coalfield (Ellington Colliery) closed in 2005. [108]
A few things to note:-
Coal Output – according to Sunnyside Local History Society, prior to the introduction of tramroads and then railways the combined output of the Northumberland and Durham coalfields was around 2,000,000 tons of coal per annum. [109] By 1850, the output was around 5,800,000 tons. By 1865, the coal exported from the combined coalfield was about 6,400,000 tons per annum. The railways and, prior to them, the tramroads enabled this dramatic increase, markedly increasing productivity and reducing costs. [110]
The location of Darlington and Stockton – both are some distance outside the Durham Coalfield. It is reasonable to ask what it was that meant that a railway route via Darlington to Stockton on the River Tees was considered to be the best route for the export of coal from the Southwest area of the coalfield. In practical terms, although the River Wear penetrated the Durham Coalfield close to the deposits in the Southwest, it was not navigable for much of its length. This meant that the distance to the port at Stockton (where the Tees was navigable) was shorter than the distance to Sunderland. The coal that was produced in the Southwest of the coalfield was either for local use or travelled by pack horse routes across the higher ground between the River Wear and the River Tees, or were carted on poorly surfaced roads to Stockton. It was natural, therefore to look to improve the route already used, rather than seek out significantly different alternative routes to the North and East. Landowners in the Southwest of the coalfield would only be able to exploit the coal reserves under their land once an economically sustainable transport method could be devised.
Pack horses – could carry about an eighth of a ton each. [111]
Tramroads – dramatically increased the capacity which a single horse could pull, from around 1 ton over uneven and poorly maintained roads to around 10 tons/horse. The problem, in the early 1800s, was to cost of horses and fodder. The Napoleonic Wars resulted in a dramatic increase in the cost of fodder and horses became more scarce as a result of the demands made by the wars. Landowners needed cheaper ways to transport coal to the ports for onward transport to London and the South. [112]
Canals – a number of different schemes were considered but foundered because of cost or the level differences involved in reach mines in the Pennine hills. If viable, they would have dramatically increased the load which could be pulled by one horse to as much as 30 tons! [111]
Steam railways – initially saw the amount of freight carried as 80 tons/locomotive (the amount pulled by Locomotion No. 1 on its inaugural trip on the Stockton and Darlington Railway). [113] And would go on to be able to move 100s of tons in single trains as the technology improved.
The Development of the Stockton & Darlington Railway
Until the 19th century, coal from the inland mines in southern County Durham used to be taken away on packhorses. Then later by horse-drawn carts as the roads were improved. [47]
A number of canal schemes failed.
Promoters included George Dixon, John Rennie, James Bradley and Robert Whitworth. [117]
The River Tees was straightened in the early 19th century through the creation of two cuts, the Mandale Cut (1810 – 220 yards long, saving over 2 miles of journey) and the Portrack Cut (1831 – 700 yards long), significantly improving access to Stockton’s port. [47]
Also in the early 19th century, another canal was proposed to take coal from the mines in the Southwest of Co. Durham to Stockton. The proposed route bypassed Yarm and Darlington and the scheme was resisted by Edward Pease and Jonathan Backhouse, both of Darlington. [47] It was at a meeting held in Yarm to oppose the construction of the canal that a tramroad was proposed. [48: p16] The Welsh engineer George Overton advised building a tramroad. He carried out a survey [49: p45-47] and planned a route from the Etherley and Witton Collieries to Shildon, and then passing to the north of Darlington to reach Stockton. The Scottish engineer Robert Stevenson was said to favour the railway, and the Quaker Edward Pease supported it at a public meeting in Darlington on 13th November 1818, promising a five per cent return on investment. [48: p16-17][49: p55 & 63] Approximately two-thirds of the shares were sold locally, and the rest were bought by Quakers nationally. [50: p33, 52, 79–80, 128][51][52][53: p223] A private bill was presented to Parliament in March 1819, but as the route passed through Earl of Eldon’s estate and one of the Earl of Darlington’s fox coverts, it was opposed and defeated by 13 votes. [11][54]
This plan, drawn by George Stephenson shows the original tramroad proposed by George Overton and George Stephenson’s own proposals for a railway. [118]
The first submission of a bill for what became the Stockton & Darlington Railway was deferred because of the death of George III. A revised bill was submitted on 30th September 1820. The route had to avoid the lands of Lord Darlington and Viscount Barrington. [49: p64-67][54]
The railway was unopposed this time, but the bill nearly failed to enter the committee stage as the required four-fifths of shares had not been sold. Pease subscribed £7,000; from that time he had considerable influence over the railway and it became known as “the Quaker line”. The Stockton and Darlington Railway Act 1821 (1 & 2 Geo. 4. c. xliv), which received royal assent on 19th April 1821, allowed for a railway that could be used by anyone with suitably built vehicles on payment of a toll, that was closed at night, and with which land owners within 5 miles (8 km) could build branches and make junctions;[49: p70][50: p37] no mention was made of steam locomotives. [48: p19][54]
What does seem significant, with the benefit of hindsight, is the way that this new railway initiated the construction of more railway lines, causing significant developments in railway mapping and cartography, iron and steel manufacturing, as well as in any industries requiring more efficient transportation. The railway(s) produced a demand for railway related supplies while simultaneously providing the mechanisms which brought significant economies of scale and logistics to many manufacturers and businesses [54][56][57]
This graph shows just how significant industrial growth was in the period before 1870 The vertical scale is logarithmic and we are focussing only on the period from 1800 to 1870. Each element of the industrial economy is set to a value of 100 in the year 1700. By 1800 the metals and mining sector had grown to 4.6 times its value in 1700, by 1870 it had risen to 618 times the 1700 value. The very rapid rise is due primarily to improvements in technology of which the railways were a dominant part. [119]Edward Pease and George Stephenson, (c) Public Domain.
“Edward Pease (1767-1858) was the chief inspiration and founder of the S&DR, in choosing a railway rather than a canal, in promoting its route, via Darlington, and adopting steam locomotive power.” [58: p13] Edward Pease had some concerns about George Overton’s competence in respect of railway construction. He turned to George Stephenson who had proven himself to be an excellent engine-wright at the Killingworth collieries, for advice. [54] In addition, Pease invested £7,000 (as much as £750,000 today) of his own money to overcome cashflow problems
A early share certificate (1823) for the Stockton and Darlington Railway. [127]
Pease also undertook, with fellow Quakers, what was perhaps the first targeted national sale of shares. They sought a wider involvement in share ownership beyond those immediately involved with their project.
On 12th May 1821 the shareholders appointed Thomas Meynell as chairman and Jonathan Backhouse as treasurer; a majority of the managing committee, which included Thomas Richardson, Edward Pease and his son Joseph Pease, were Quakers. The committee designed a seal, showing waggons being pulled by a horse, and adopted the Latin motto Periculum privatum utilitas publica (“At private risk for public service”).[49: p73][50: p184] By 23rd July 1821, it had decided that the line would be a railway with edge rails, rather than a plateway, and appointed Stephenson to make a fresh survey of the line, [49: p74][54]
The seal of the railway company was designed in 1821. It is clear that, at that time at least, the planned railway was not intended for steam propulsion or passenger use.
The Latin motto is Periculum privatum utilitas publica (At private risk for public service). [54]
Stephenson recommended using malleable iron rails, even though he owned a share of the patent for cast iron rails. Malleable iron rails formed about 65% of the railway but cast iron rails were used at junctions and on the remainder of the line. [4][59: p74][60]
By the end of 1821, Stephenson “had reported that a usable line could be built within the bounds of the Act of Parliament, but another route would be shorter by 3 miles (5 km) and avoid deep cuttings and tunnels.” [48: p20]
“Overton had kept himself available, but had no further involvement and the shareholders elected Stephenson [as] Engineer on 22nd January 1822, with a salary of £660 per year. [49: p79-80] On 23rd May 1822 a ceremony in Stockton celebrated the laying of the first track at St John’s Well, the rails 4 ft 8 in (1,422 mm) apart, [61] the same gauge used by Stephenson on his Killingworth Railway.” [48: p20][54] This was altered to 4 ft 8½ in to reduce binding on curves. [120: p19]
“Stephenson advocated the use of steam locomotives on the line. [48: p19] Pease visited Killingworth in mid-1822 [62: p154] and the directors visited Hetton colliery railway, on which Stephenson had introduced steam locomotives. [49: p83] A new bill was presented, requesting Stephenson’s deviations from the original route and the use of “locomotives or moveable engines”, and this received royal assent on 23rd May 1823 as the Stockton and Darlington Railway Act 1823 (4 Geo. 4. c. xxxiii).[49: p85-86] The line included embankments up to 48 feet (15 m) high, and Stephenson designed an iron truss bridge to cross the River Gaunless. The Skerne Bridge over the River Skerne was designed by the Durham architect Ignatius Bonomi.” [59: p75][65][54] George Stephenson’s bridge over the Gaunless suffered flood damage and had to be rebuilt – the directors of the railway company instructed Stephenson to consult Bonomi about the construction of Skerne Bridge – Bonomi designed a stone arch bridge, with a single arch spanning the river and two smaller flood arches over the paths either side. Bonomi’s bridge is still in use today. “Being the oldest railway bridge in continuous use in the world, it is a Grade I listed building.” [68]
By 1823, Stephenson and Pease had opened Robert Stephenson and Company, a locomotive works at Forth Street, Newcastle, from which the following year the S&DR ordered two steam locomotives and two stationary engines. [49: p95-96][54]
This highlights another way in which the S&DR was very much of its time and looked different from a modern railway: It only used locomotives (or horses) on the level sections of the line. Inclines were operated by a combination of gravity and steam-power from stationary engines.
“On 16th September 1825, with the stationary engines in place, the first locomotive, ‘Locomotion No. 1’, left the works, and the following day it was advertised that the railway would open on 27th September 1825.” [49: p105][54]
The Opening of the Line
Wikipedia tells us that “the cost of building the railway had greatly exceeded the estimates. By September 1825, the company had borrowed £60,000 in short-term loans and needed to start earning an income to ward off its creditors. A railway coach, named Experiment, [71] arrived on the evening of 26th September 1825 and was attached to Locomotion No. 1, which had been placed on the rails for the first time at Aycliffe Lane station following the completion of its journey by road from Newcastle earlier that same day. Pease, Stephenson and other members of the committee then made an experimental journey to Darlington before taking the locomotive and coach to Shildon in preparation for the opening day, with James Stephenson, George’s elder brother, at the controls. [49: p105-106] On 27th September, between 7 am and 8 am, 12 waggons of coal [74] were drawn up Etherley North Bank by a rope attached to the stationary engine at the top, and then let down the South Bank to St Helen’s Auckland. A waggon of flour bags was attached and horses hauled the train across the Gaunless Bridge to the bottom of Brusselton West Bank, where thousands watched the second stationary engine draw the train up the incline. The train was let down the East Bank to Mason’s Arms Crossing at Shildon Lane End, where Locomotion No. 1, Experiment and 21 new coal waggons fitted with seats were waiting.” [49: p109-110]
Between 450 and 600 people travelled behind Locomotion No. 1, most in empty waggons but some on top of waggons full of coal. Wikipedia tells us that “brakesmen were placed between the waggons, and the train set off, led by a man on horseback with a flag. It picked up speed on the gentle downward slope and reached 10 to 12 miles per hour (16 to 19 km/h), leaving behind men on field hunters (horses) who had tried to keep up with the procession. The train stopped when the waggon carrying the company surveyors and engineers lost a wheel; the waggon was left behind and the train continued. The train stopped again, this time for 35 minutes to repair the locomotive and the train set off again, reaching 15 mph (24 km/h) before it was welcomed by an estimated 10,000 people as it came to a stop at the Darlington branch junction. Eight and a half miles (14 km) had been covered in two hours, and subtracting the 55 minutes accounted by the two stops, it had travelled at an average speed of 8 mph (13 km/h). Six waggons of coal were distributed to the poor, workers stopped for refreshments and many of the passengers from Brusselton alighted at Darlington, to be replaced by others.” [49: p110-112][54][59: p85]
Wikipedia continues: “Two waggons for the Yarm Band were attached, and at 12:30 pm the locomotive started for Stockton, now hauling 31 vehicles with 550 passengers. On the 5 miles (8 km) of nearly level track east of Darlington the train struggled to reach more than 4 mph (6.4 km/h). At Eaglescliffe near Yarm crowds waited for the train to cross the Stockton to Yarm turnpike. Approaching Stockton, running alongside the turnpike as it skirted the western edge of Preston Park, it gained speed and reached 15 mph (24 km/h) again, before a man clinging to the outside of a waggon fell off and his foot was crushed by the following vehicle. As work on the final section of track to Stockton’s quayside was still ongoing, the train halted at the temporary passenger terminus at St John’s Well 3 hours, 7 minutes after leaving Darlington. The opening ceremony was considered a success and that evening 102 people sat down to a celebratory dinner at the Town Hall.” [49: p112-114]
The story of the opening day illustrates effectively that the line was not hauled throughout by steam locomotives and relied significantly on stationary steam engines for managing movements on steep inclines.
Early Days
“The railway that opened in September 1825 was 25 miles (40 km) long and ran from Phoenix Pit, Old Etherley Colliery, to Cottage Row, Stockton; there was also a 1⁄2 mile (800 m) branch to the depot at Darlington, 1⁄2 mile (800 m) of the Hagger Leases branch, and a 3⁄4 mile (1,200 m) branch to Yarm. [49: p106] Most of the track used 28 pounds per yard (13.9 kg/m) malleable iron rails, and 4 miles (6.4 km) of 57 1⁄2 lb/yd (28.5 kg/m) cast iron rails were used for junctions.” [49: p89-90][54][79] To put this in context, modern railway rails typically weigh between 40 to 70 kg/m (88 to 154 lb/yd), with heavier rails used for higher speeds and axle loads. In Europe, a common range is 40 to 60 kg/m, while in North America, it’s more common to see rails in the 55 to 70kg/m (115 to 154 lb/yd) range. The heaviest mass-produced rail was 77.5 kg/m (171 lb/yd). [78][79][80]
The full length of the Stockton & Darlington Railway in 1827 – modern railways are shown as red lines. [54][81]
The S&DR was “single track with four passing loops per mile; [48: p27] square sleepers supported each rail separately so that horses could walk between them. [59: p74] Stone was used for the sleepers to the west of Darlington and oak to the east; Stephenson would have preferred all of them to have been stone, but the transport cost was too high as they were quarried in the Auckland area. [49: p91] The railway opened with the company owing money and unable to raise further loans; Pease advanced money twice early in 1826 so the workers could be paid. By August 1827 the company had paid its debts and was able to raise more money; that month the Black Boy branch opened and construction began on the Croft and Hagger Leases branches. During 1827, shares rose from £120 at the start to £160 at the end.” [49: p138-140][54] Horses could haul up to four waggons. Dandy Waggons were introduced in mid-1828. A Dandy Waggon “was a small cart at the end of the train that carried the horse downhill, allowing it to rest while the train descended under gravity. The S&DR made their use compulsory from November 1828.” [48: p27][49: p154-156][54]
“The line was initially used to carry coal to Darlington and Stockton, carrying 10,000 tons [82] in the first three months and earning nearly £2,000. In Stockton, the price of coal dropped from 18 to 12 shillings, and by the beginning of 1827 was … 8s 6d.[49: p117, 119] At first, the drivers had been paid a daily wage, but after February 1826 they were paid 1⁄4d per ton per mile; from this they had to pay assistants and fireman and to buy coal for the locomotive. [49: p132] The 1821 Act of Parliament had received opposition from the owners of collieries on the River Wear who supplied London and feared competition, and it had been necessary to restrict the rate for transporting coal destined for ships to 1⁄2d per ton per mile, which had been assumed would make the business uneconomic. There was interest from London for 100,000 tons a year, so the company began investigations in September 1825. In January 1826, the first staith opened at Stockton, designed so waggons over a ship’s hold could discharge coal from the bottom. [49: p120-121] About 18,500 tons of coal was transported to ships in the year ending June 1827, and this increased to over 52,000 tons the following year, 44.5% of the total carried.” [49: p136][54]
Locomotives
“The locomotives were unreliable at first. Soon after opening, Locomotion No. 1 broke a wheel, and it was not ready for traffic until 12th or 13th October; Hope, the second locomotive, arrived in November 1825 but needed a week to ready it for the line – the cast-iron wheels were a source of trouble. [49: p118-119, 142] Two more locomotives of a similar design arrived in 1826; that August, 16s 9d was spent on ale to motivate the men maintaining the engines. [49: p118-119, 142] By the end of 1827, the company had also bought Chittaprat from Robert Wilson and Experiment from Stephenson. Timothy Hackworth, locomotive superintendent, used the boiler from the unsuccessful Chittaprat to build the Royal George in the works at Shildon; it started work at the end of November.” [49: p116, 142-143][54] A drawing of the Royal George appears below.
The boiler was a plain cylinder 13 ft. long and 4 ft. 4 in. in diameter. There were six coupled wheels 4 feet in diameter, and the cylinders, which were placed vertically at the end opposite to the fire place, were 11″ diameter, the stroke of the piston being 20 inches. The piston rods worked downward and were connected to the first pair of wheels. [122]
Problems with the locomotives may have seen the railway reverting to the use of horses but for the fact that Pease and Thomas Richardson were partners with Stephenson in the Newcastle works. Locomotives were clearly superior to horses when they were working. In his book, Tomlinson showed that coal was being moved by locomotive at half the cost of using horses. Rolt could not imagine the company reverting to horses. [83] Robert Young states that the company was unsure as to the real costs as they reported to shareholders in 1828 that the saving using locomotives was 30 per cent. Young also showed that Pease and Richardson were both concerned about their investment in the Newcastle works and Pease unsuccessfully tried to sell his share to George Stephenson. [50: p61-63][54][84]
“New locomotives were ordered from Stephenson’s, but the first was too heavy when it arrived in February 1828. It was rebuilt with six wheels and hailed as a great improvement, Hackworth being told to convert the remaining locomotives as soon as possible. In 1828, two locomotive boilers exploded within four months, both killing the driver and both due to the safety valves being left fixed down while the engine was stationary.” [49: p146-148][54]
Hackworth redesigned locomotive wheels – cast-iron wheels used to fracture too easily. His solution was the first use of “a system of cast iron wheel with a wrought iron tyre shrunk on. The wheels were made up in parts because the lathes in the Shildon workshops were too small to turn up the rims when fixed upon the axle. They were dotted with plug holes to ensure sound castings and reduce unnecessary weight. This new wheel type was very efficient and so was used on nearly every engine on the S&DR and on other railways for many years.” [124: p157-8][125: p30].
He designed the spring safety valve. He perfected the blast pipe and again it was to be used on many engines subsequently. Perhaps the most important invention was the blast pipe which ensured that boiler pressure was always maintained; thus curing the lack of steam found in Stephenson’s earlier engines.
Hackworth lagged Royal George’s boiler with strips of mahogany to insulate it. “Royal George” was built for coal traffic and so was designed to be strong and with good tractive adhesion suitable in all weathers and the blast pipe doubled the amount of useful work [it] could do.” [124: p228]. The ‘blast pipe’ discharged exhaust steam through a converging nozzle blast pipe in the chimney, greatly increasing combustion intensity and steam production.
“The S&DR was designed to be operated by travelling locomotive and through the skills of Timothy Hackworth, it was here that the locomotive engine became reliable and efficient. Through his work for the S&DR, confidence in the use of locomotives was gradually built up so that other embryonic railway companies were also prepared to embark on their use. By the time the Liverpool and Manchester line opened in 1830 the S&DR had 12 locomotives and by 1832 it had 19.” [125: p2]
“The surviving documentation suggests that without Hackworth’s promotion of the locomotive and his key developments such as the plug wheel and blast pipe which allowed the practical and ultimately successful implementation of locomotive power on the S&DR for all to see, then the railways that followed would have significantly delayed the use of travelling locomotives. Hackworth cast enough doubt in the Director’s minds of the Liverpool & Manchester Railway about the dangers and short comings of rope pulled inclines, that they organised the Rainhill Trials only months before opening in order to test the power and efficiency of various locomotives. … From 1828 when the locomotives were proven technology (thanks to Hackworth’s design of the Royal George the previous year), there was a growth in locomotive engineering companies in England, and by 1830, also in America and France.” [125: p3]
“Perhaps there was no man in the whole engineering world more prepared for the time in which he lived. He was a man of great inventive ability, great courage in design, and most daring in its application…” (The Auckland Chronicle, 29th April 1876 referring to Timothy Hackworth)
Passengers
Wikipedia tells us that “passenger traffic started on 10th October 1825, after the required licence was purchased, using the Experiment coach hauled by a horse. The coach was initially timetabled to travel from Stockton to Darlington in two hours, with a fare of 1s, and made a return journey four days a week and a one-way journey on Tuesdays and Saturdays. In April 1826, the operation of the coach was contracted for £200 a year; by then the timetabled journey time had been reduced to 1 hour 15 minutes, and passengers were allowed to travel on the outside for 9d. A more comfortable coach, Express, started the same month and charged 1s 6d for travel inside. [49: p122-126] Innkeepers began running coaches, two to Shildon from July, and TheUnion, which served the Yarm branch from 16th October. [49: p126-127] There were no stations: [87: p117] in Darlington the coaches picked up passengers near the North Road Crossing, whereas in Stockton they picked up at different places on the quay. [49: p130] Between 30,000 and 40,000 passengers were carried between July 1826 and June 1827.” [49: p131]
“The Union” started operating on 16th October 1825 and ran between Stockton and Yarm. [121]
Innovation occurred relatively quickly, the company decided that it needed to provide hostelries (pubs) close to its coal depots. Tickets were sold in various locations but, significantly, in the pubs closest to pick up points. The practice mirrored what happened with stagecoaches.
Perhaps a more significant change seems to have happened almost organically. … Some of the buildings at coal depots began to provide space for passengers to wait along with other goods to be carried by the railway. … Heighington was a wayside location on the railway. It had a coal depot, and the S&DR built a public house in 1826-1827 to oversee the coal depot. Historic England describe the building as a proto-railway station, built before the concept of the railway station had fully developed. [123] This was the first such structure on the railway.
This was one among a number of loading and unloading depots which would evolve into the now familiar railway architecture such as goods and passenger stations. [125]
Developing Understanding
In truth, a lot of work went into getting three different forms of traction to harmonise – horse, inclined plane and locomotives on a single line. This was further complicated by the fact that it was a public railway that anyone could use subject to payment and an agreement to abide by any rules. The increasingly popular use of the single line also meant that rules had to be established for giving way and the ‘first past the post’ system was adopted. Signalling considered (but blocked by local landowners), [128: p12] warnings were sounded on the approach to level crossings, braking systems improved and sleepers made heavier. There was no past experience to learn from, no book to consult and the duties of railway officials had yet to be clearly defined. [124: p121]
“The S&DR led the way in devising a system to run a public railway. It was here that passenger timetables evolved, baggage allowances were created, rules made regarding punishment for non-purchase of tickets, job descriptions for railway staff evolved and signalling and braking developed and improved for regular use. The S&DR also recognised the need for locomotives of a different design to haul passengers rather than heavy goods and the need to provide facilities for passengers and workers at stations – all before 1830.” [125: p2]
The Stockton & Darlington’s regulations were initially laid down in ten ‘rules’ set out in the company’s Act of Incorporation of 19th April 1821, which established fines for those failing to preserve order and security on the railway. These were of a fairly general nature. [128: p12-13]
Two rules had attached to them the massive (for the day) fine of £5, these required wagons to be especially constructed for the railway, to bear the owner’s name and wagon number in 3-inch high lettering, and to allow the company to gauge wagons if it felt necessary.
By July 1826, these rules were supplemented by 24 byelaws and rules concerning wagons taking to sidings, all of these suggesting that there were shortcomings in the original rules which were discovered as an early result of operational experience. [128: p67-68]
After the launch date in 1825, other advances followed rapidly. “The growth of health and safety, the administration of running a regional railway, … and, [critically,] commercial success that would reassure other investors that it was safe to invest in their own regional railway that would soon form part of a national and then international railway network. The first purpose-built goods station (as opposed to coal and lime which went to the depot down the road) was opened in Darlington 1827. … [It formed] the inspiration for the later 1830 warehouse at Liverpool Road Station in Manchester which still survives.” [125]
“Many aspects of the line were still unproven technology when they came to be used in the context of a public regional railway. Until it could be proven (and the launch of 1825 went some way to do that with enough customers ready to pay for the service to immediately allay fears of money losses), that the line had to work first before it could be expanded. It was up to the S&DR to find a way forward as new problems arose. [Much of that responsibility fell on Timothy Hackworth’s shoulders.] … Through the hard knocks of money shortages, operating difficulties and the limitations of contemporary engineering, the S&DR had discovered what would be necessary [to run a railway] by the start of 1829, at a time when the L&MR was still vacillating over vital traction and operating decisions.” [126: p11-12]
A Change in Passenger and Goods Services
It was 1833, before the passenger railway service began to become something like we would recognise today. By 1833, it had become obvious that the competing needs of passengers and goods under an open access model needed to be managed. Network management, capacity and overall co-ordination were increasingly seen as important. As the network expanded, the conflicts increased. Until 1833, passenger services were run by external contractors. In 1833, the S&DR took on this responsibility directly.
The railway changed from a kind of ‘public road’ on which all-comers could transport goods and passengers to a system where services were co-ordinated, managed, timetabled and run by the Company.
The S&DR established a permanent rail infrastructure providing a regular service transporting both goods and passengers. In this particular sense, the S&DR was truly the launch of a modern railway network. Managed, timetabled services for passengers and goods made possible the rapid expansion of railways in the 19th century across the globe, together with attendant huge worldwide social and economic change.
In a railway context, everything was being done for the first time:
the keeping of general records; various statistical and financial records; employment of staff and rules; at first all drivers were self-employed and paid their firemen themselves.
Engine shed maintenance records; the need for dedicated general goods facilities; all arrangements for passengers; the management and supply of first coke and then coal for use by steam engines. ….
The S&DR, from the official launch in September 1825, “was at the forefront of technology in terms of operating locomotives regularly and over a relatively long stretch of line, it was to the S&DR that other embryonic railway companies looked to. Railway engineers and promoters from other parts of the UK, France, and the USA attended the opening ceremony in 1825. Two of those distinguished French guests went on to found France’s first public railway. Others were to visit the S&DR Works in the years that followed including engineers from Prussia who took copious detailed notes on Hackworth’s experiments. Hackworth himself shared his results widely (often at the request of Edward Pease) and organised trials at the request of engineers from other companies who were torn between the use of canal versus railway, or horse versus locomotive, or stationary versus travelling engine. The S&DR was at its most influential until around 1830.” [125: p2] A very short period of time!
Beyond 1830, “there were significant technological achievements … such as the delivery of Russia’s first locomotives to the Tsar in the 1840s from Hackworth’s Soho Works in Shildon, the continuing evolution of the first railway towns at New Shildon and Middlesbrough and the delivery of gas to the works in New Shildon in 1841 before anywhere else in the country apart from Grainger Town in Newcastle. Further the grouping of internationally important structures with later pioneering structures (such as at North Road in Darlington or at Locomotion in Shildon) provides an insight into those rapidly developing days of the early railway and add value to each other.” [125: p3]
The First ‘Railway’ Town – New Shildon
Shildon was, at the start of the 1820s, just a tiny hamlet, (c) National Library of Scotland. [105]The same area South of Bishop Auckland as it appears on Stephenson’s survey of 1821. Shildon still appears as a tiny hamlet. [118]On Dixon’s Plan of 1839, there is new housing, the S&DR’s Shildon Works, bottom left, and Timothy Hackworth’s Soho Works, top right. [129]New Shildon has developed significantly by the time of this map extract. A significant number of streets are now present, and both the railway works and Hackworth’s Soho Works have expanded. Note Shildon’s Railway Station at the right side of the image. [130]By the 21st century New Shildon has completely swallowed the original hamlet of Shildon and urban sprawl has devoured all of the land North to Bishop Auckland. [Google Maps, August 2025]
The Second ‘Railway’ Town – Port Darlington and Middlesbrough
The ongoing story of the railway company is one of strong growth particularly in the carriage of goods. It opened its own port near the mouth of the River Tees.
The S&DR played a significant role in the rapid expansion of Middlesbrough. Initially a farming community of around 25 people at the beginning of the 19th century, it transformed into a major iron and steel producer, “spurred by the arrival of the Stockton and Darlington Railway and the discovery of iron ore in the Cleveland Hills. This rapid expansion led to a significant population increase and the development of a new town, planned by Joseph Pease and others, centred around a gridiron street pattern and a market square. [85][86] Middlesbrough had only a few houses before the coming of the railway, [87] but a year later had a population of over 2,000 and at the 2011 census had over 138,000 people. [88][89] Port Darlington was first established, as shown on the left of the image below, which also shows the gridiron street pattern in what would become Middlesbrough, the new town on the right of the image. [95]
Port Darlington’s staithes are on the left of this development plan, the fan of sidings and the staithes can be seen close to the red dot. This plan also shows the planned gridiron street pattern in the new town, on the right of the image behind the wharfs where ships could be loaded and unloaded. [95]The same area in the 21st century, the red dot provides continuity between these two images. A single rail siding still serves the area which had the staithes and some of the gridiron pattern of streets remains. The first house was completed in the New Town in the Spring of 1830. [Google Maps July 2025]
We have already noted the staithes built at Port Darlington to allow more mechanised loading of ships. These staithes were ingeniously designed, even if health and safety was not as paramount as perhaps it should have been. The Port of Middlesbrough describes the operation: “Staithes were elevated platforms for discharging coal and other materials from railway cars into coal ships for transport. … A steam engine hoisted a wagon full of coal off the line and about 20 feet into the air, where it landed on a gantry. A horse then pulled the wagon along the gantry and out over the water. At the end of the gantry, the wagon was strapped into a cradle and, with a man clinging to it, was swung in an arc on to the ship below. Here, the man unbolted the bottom of the wagon and the coal fell into the hold. Finally, the weight of the next full wagon swinging downwards caused the empty wagon and the man to swing upwards back to the gantry.” [95]
Plans from the port authority are shown below. It is difficult to imagine the process described from looking at these plans. It may be that the plans show a later design of staithe.
One of the staithes at Port Darlington/Middlesbrough Dock. [95]A closer view of the staithe shown in the image above. [95]
The years after 1827 (once Company finances were on a sound footing)
A series of different extensions and branches to the S&DR appeared over the period from 1827. [54] “In 1830, the company opened new offices at the corner of Northgate and Union Street in Darlington. [49:p189] Between 1831 and 1832 a second track was laid between Stockton and the foot of Brusselton Bank. Workshops were built at Shildon for the maintenance and construction of locomotives. [49: p235-236] In 1830, approximately 50 horses shared the traffic with 19 locomotives, but travelled at different speeds, so to help regulate traffic horse-drawn trains were required to operate in groups of four or five.” [54] The rule book stated that locomotive-hauled trains had precedence over horse-drawn trains. Even so, accidents and conflict occurred. The practice was to allow private use of the line by industries that it served, “some horse drivers refused to give way and on one occasion a locomotive had to follow a horse-drawn train for over 2 miles (3 km). [49: p383-384][50: p91-94] The committee decided, in 1828, to replace horses with locomotives on the main line, starting with the coal trains, but there was resistance from some colliery owners.” [54]
“After the S&DR bought out the local coach companies in August 1832, a mixed [locomotive-hauled] passenger and small goods service began between Stockton and Darlington on 7th September 1833, travelling at 12–14 miles per hour (19–23 km/h); locomotive-hauled services began to Shildon in December 1833 and to Middlesbrough on 7th April 1834. [49: p384-385][50: p68] The company had returned the five per cent dividend that had been promised by Edward Pease, and this had increased to eight per cent by the time he retired in 1832.” [50: p87-88][54]
In 1835, the S&DR partnered with the York & North Midland Railway (Y&NMR) to form the Great North of England Railway (GNER) to build a line from York to Newcastle which along the would run along the line of the S&DR’s Croft branch at Darlington. Pease specified a formation wide enough for four tracks, so freight could be carried at 30 miles per hour (48 km/h) and passengers at 60 mph (97 km/h), and George Stephenson had drawn up detailed plans by November 1835. [48: p64-65][54] The Acts of Parliament enabling the scheme were given royal assent on 4th July 1836 (Darlington to Newcastle) and 12th July 1837 (Croft to York). The railway opened for coal traffic on 4th January 1841 using S&DR locomotives, and to passengers with its own locomotives on 30th March 1841. [48: 67-69][54][87: p93-94]
A patchwork of different schemes was to follow:
By February 1842, a passenger service between Darlington and Coxhoe supported by an omnibus service to Shincliffe on the Durham & Sunderland Railway. [87: p165]
Early in 1842, the Shildon Tunnel Company opened its 1,225-yard (1,120 m) tunnel through the hills at Shildon to the Wear basin and after laying 2 miles (3.2 km) of track to South Church station, south of Bishop Auckland, opened in May 1842. [49: p435-437]
In 1846, the S&DR installed Alexander Bain’s “I and V” electric telegraph to regulate the passage of trains through the tunnel. [90: p52-53]
The SD&R provided a 3 1⁄4 hour service between Darlington and Newcastle, with a four-horse omnibus from South Church to Rainton Meadows on the Durham Junction Railway, from where trains ran to Gateshead, on the south side of the River Tyne near Newcastle. [48: p74]
By 1839, the S&DR track “had been upgraded with rails weighing 64 lb/yd (32 kg/m). [91: p415] The railway had about 30 steam locomotives, most of them six coupled, [91: p419] that ran with four-wheeled tenders with two water butts, each capable of holding 600 imperial gallons (2,700 L; 720 US gal) of water. [91: p422] The line descended from Shildon to Stockton, assisting the trains that carried coal to the docks at a maximum speed of 6 mph (9.7 km/h); the drivers were fined if caught travelling faster than 8 mph (13 km/h), [91: p415, 422] and one was dismissed for completing the forty-mile return journey in 4 1⁄2 hours. [59: p136-137] On average there were about 40 coal trains a day, hauling 28 waggons with a weight of 116 tons. [91: p423] There were about 5,000 privately owned waggons, and at any one time about 1,000 stood at Shildon depot.” [54][91: p417-418]
Wikipedia continues: “The railway had modern passenger locomotives, some [still] with four wheels. [91: p421-422] There were passenger stations at Stockton, Middlesbrough, Darlington, Shildon and West Auckland, and trains also stopped at Middlesbrough Junction, Yarm Junction, Fighting Cocks and Heighington. [91: p416] [A significant improvement on early passenger practice.] Some of the modified road coaches were still in use, but there were also modern railway carriages, some first class with three compartments each seating eight passengers, and second class carriages that seated up to 40. [91: p416][92] Luggage and sometimes the guard travelled on the carriage roof; [49: p423] a passenger travelling third class suffered serious injuries after falling from the roof in 1840. [49: p400] Passenger trains averaged 22–25 mph (35–40 km/h), and a speed of 42 mph (68 km/h) was recorded. Over 200,000 passengers were carried in the year to 1st October 1838, [91: p419] and in 1839 there were twelve trains each day between Middlesbrough and Stockton, six trains between Stockton and Darlington, and three between Darlington and Shildon, where a carriage was fitted with Rankine’s self-acting brake, taken over the Brussleton Inclines, and then drawn by a horse to St Helen Auckland. [91: p418] The Bradshaw’s railway guide for March 1843, after South Church opened, shows five services a day between Darlington and South Church via Shildon, with three between Shildon and St Helens. Also listed were six trains between Stockton and Hartlepool via Seaton [94] over the Clarence Railway and the Stockton and Hartlepool Railway that had opened in 1841.” [87: p146-147][54]
During the 1830s, Port Darlington quickly became overwhelmed by the volume of traffic (both imports and exports) and work started in 1839 on Middlesbrough Dock which was laid out by William Cubitt and capable of holding 150 ships! It was “built by resident civil engineer George Turnbull. [89] … After three years and an expenditure of £122,000 (equivalent to £9.65m at 2011 prices), the formal opening of the new dock took place on 12 May 1842. [49: p437][89] The S&DR provided most of the finance, and the dock was absorbed by the company in 1849.” [49: p508][54] The S&DR was, by 1849, a well established and very significant company.
Ongoing Developments
Political manoeuvring to secure a route from London to Scotland via the Northeast continued during this period and the S&DR saw its stocks in the GNER increase in value before a new concern, the Newcastle and Darlington Junction Railway (N&DJR) bought out the GNER.
The S&DR also secured interests in the Wear Valley, [4] [54] a line to Redcar and Saltburn, a branch to a mine at Skelton, [4][54] a line to Barnard Castle, a route (South Durham and Lancashire Union Railway (SD&LUR)) over Stainmore Summit to Tebay, [54] and, through running rights over the Eden Valley Railway (EVR) and the Lancaster & Carlisle Railway (L&CR), to Penrith. “The S&DR opened a carriage works south of Darlington North Road station in 1853 [98] and later it built a locomotive works nearby to replace its works at Shildon [which was] designed by William Bouch, who had taken over from Hackworth as Locomotive Supervisor in 1840, it completed its first locomotive in 1864.” [54][87: p8][99] The inclines, built when stationary engines were used, were bypassed by lines on gentler grades. By the early 1860s, the S&DR had a significant network, even having absorbed the EVR and the SD&LUR. [54]
“With 200 route miles (320 km) of line and about 160 locomotives, [100: p167] the Stockton and Darlington Railway became part of the North Eastern Railway on 13th July 1863. Due to a clause in the North Eastern and Stockton and Darlington Railways Amalgamation Act 1863 (26 & 27 Vict. c. cxxii) the railway was managed as the independent Darlington Section until 1876, when the lines became the NER’s Central Division. [87: p9][48: p133] After the restoration of the dividend in 1851, by the end of 1854 payments had recovered to 8 per cent and then had not dropped below 7 1⁄2 per cent.” [50: Appendix 1][54]
I guess that we might easily be able to agree that the Stockton & Darlington Railway was of great local significance. It significantly reduced the cost of coal supplied to Stockton and Darlington. It temporarily enhanced the Port at Stockton before moving that trade downstream to Middlesbrough. It dramatically improved the speed of supply of larger quantities of coal. It made the town and Port of Middlesbrough. It linked the industries of Cumbia and Cleveland allowing speedy transport of coal and iron-ore to the different industries. It improved passenger travel East-West and began with others the development of North-South travel freight and passenger train travel. ……
But how has the Stockton & Darlington Railway transcended the local and become internationally significant? ……
Why Is the Stockton & Darlington Railway So Important?
So, what is the case? Was the S&DR the first real railway?
As 2025 got underway, this question prompted me to look at what is known of railway history in the period from 1800 to 1850, and led to the writing of an article (online) about railway developments during that period. The article is entitled ‘The Mother of All Inventions‘. [2]
September 2025 marked the bicentenary of the Stockton & Darlington Railway (S&DR) and, very naturally and most appropriately, major events were planned across the UK, and enthusiasts across the world planned their own commemorations. In this context, it is, at the very least, worth considering what the S&DR can and cannot justifiably claim for itself. In fact, Anthony Dawson in an article in Steam Railway Magazine in February 2025 suggested that we best get to understand the importance of the S&DR, perversely, by considering what cannot be claimed for it. [3] What follows below is based around that article by Anthony Dawson.
Dawson says: “while every enthusiast would arguably agree that the [S&DR] is special and that the bicentenary of its opening is a landmark worthy of celebration, how many of us truly understand why the [S&DR] is so momentous? Indeed, putting the Stockton & Darlington’s importance into context isn’t exactly straightforward, nor can it be boiled down to a particular ‘first’. Therefore, to understand why the Stockton & Darlington is so important, we need to look at what it wasn’t.” [3]
He goes on to suggest that, to paraphrase Winston Churchill, “while the [S&D] was not the beginning, it was the end of the beginning. Although it wasn’t the first of anything, as early railway historian the late Andy Guy put it, it was ‘better than the first’.” [3]
Was the Stockton & Darlington the first railway?
Perhaps that question can only be answered once we have agreed a definition of a ‘railway’. Collins Dictionary offers three definitions: a railway is the steel tracks that trains travel on; a railway is a company or organization that operates railway routes; and, a railway is the system and network of tracks that trains travel on. [10] Accepting these definitions would rule out a number of early ‘railway-like’ systems based on stone and wood.
The Collins dictionary definitions are very narrowly drafted. Dawson points us to Dr Michael Lewis’ definition: A railway is “a prepared track which so guides the vehicles running on it that they cannot leave the track”. [3][11] This short, simple definition allows for the inclusion of the Diolkos and other rutways of the Classical World, [12][13] possible rutways in Wiltshire (circa 300CE), [13] Cornwall (circa 1550s), [13][14] rutways in 19th century Australia, [15] and the guide-pin railways developed in Germany and Austria in the Middle Ages. Lewis’ definition includes ‘railways’ “before the late 18th Century, [often] private … with rails essentially of wood or occasionally of stone, with carriage only of goods in vehicles propelled by horse- or by man-power, and with a variety of methods of guiding the wheels. ” [11]
Dawson comments that, “The earliest evidence for ‘railways’ in this country comes from the Lake District when German-speaking immigrants led by Daniel Hochstetter introduced them to silver mines at Caldbeck during the reign of Elizabeth I. These railways consisted of longitudinal planks which guided an iron pin secured to the bottom of a four-wheel mine cart, working rather like a slot-car. … But the first [‘true’] railway in England was very likely that built by Huntingdon Beaumont in 1604 to carry coal from his pits at Wollaton near Nottingham down to the River Trent. It was made entirely from wood and greatly improved the transport of coal for onward shipping by water. So pleased was Beaumont with this new technology, he invested heavily in four similar railways around Newcastle, which were built to carry coal down to the Tyne. Beaumont, however, failed to break into the local market. This, coupled with heavy investment in his new railways and his lavish lifestyle, led him to being declared bankrupt, ending his days in a debtors’ prison.” [3]
Dawson goes on to say that, “following the turmoil of the English Civil War and Commonwealth period, wooden railways began to spread across Shropshire where they took on the name ‘Railed Way’ and the North-East where they were known as ‘Waggonways’ – two different names for the same idea. Indeed, as excavations on the first railway in Scotland – the Tranent to Cockenzie Waggonway of 1722 – have shown, there was very little new in the technology of a wooden railway. It [was] essentially a giant ladder laid on the ground. They used old ideas to provide a solution to a new problem.” [3]
The coming of the 18th century heralded a transport revolution. Dawson says: “The early waggonways carried largely coal and other minerals down to a staithe or wharf on a river or canal for onward shipping. Thus, they grew hand in hand with the canal network and many canal companies even owned their own waggonways as feeder lines. There was a transport revolution on the roads as well with the growth of turnpikes. Taken together, [these events] … fed and fuelled industrialisation and growing urbanisation, particularly in the North of England. Improved transport links meant coal could go to market quicker. It meant it was cheaper at the point of sale, which meant greater profits and, in turn, greater demand.” [3]
Various forms of ‘railway’ were clearly well established by the advent of the 19th century. The S&DR was clearly not the first railway.
If not the first ‘railway’, was the Stockton & Darlington the first to use iron rails?
Iron was first used in a ‘railway’ context as protective plating for the early wooden ‘railways’. Lengths of cast iron plate were nailed to the running surface of wooden rails, probably first in Coalbrookdale. Wooden rails were wearing too quickly and the iron covers improved longevity. It was a simple logical next step to move from cast-iron plate to cast-iron bars and then to either cast iron edge rails or cast iron L-shaped ‘tram-plates’. Cast-iron rails were common by the 1790s, their only real fault was that they were brittle and often broke under load. Indeed, when Trevithick’s early locomotive ‘Pen-y-darren’ made its maiden run on the Merthyr Tramroad in 1804, it was noted that the cast-iron rails were not robust enough for the heavy locomotive and a number broke. [16]
Dawson says that “What was needed was a superior type of rail … made from wrought iron. First rolled in any quantity in 1820 at Bedlington Iron Works, the Stockton & Darlington was probably the first railway to use wrought-iron rails on a large scale. Due to distrust of the new material, half of the line was laid with cast iron and half with wrought. It was a major technological breakthrough and one crucial to the development of the locomotive.” [3]
It may well be that around two thirds of the length of the railway used wrought iron rails and one third had cast iron rails. Cast iron was used for the chairs which sat on the sleepers.
A section of the original Stockton & Darlington Railway track, including the rail, chairs and sleepers, at Preston Park Museum circa. 1962 (c) Bruce Coleman, courtesy of the Shildon Archive [133]
So, it seems that the Stockton & Darlington was not the first to use iron rails but that it was important in the taking of the next technological step of employing wrought-iron rails. “Bedlington Ironworks, in Blyth Dene, Northumberland … is remembered as the place where wrought iron rails were invented by John Birkinshaw in 1820, … with their first major use being [on] the Stockton and Darlington Railway. [17] Birkinshaw’s wrought-iron rails were rolled in 15ft lengths.
If not the first railway and not the first to use iron, was the S&DR the first railway authorised by Act of Parliament?
The first Act of Parliament for a railway was obtained by Charles Brandling for what became the Middleton Railway. It ran from coal pits at Hunslet down to the River Aire. The Act received Royal Assent in 1758. A significant number of Acts of Parliament relating to railways preceded the S&D, including this small selection: [18]
The Llanelli Railway and Dock Act, 1802 and the Monmouth Railway Act 1810. [134][135]
1802: The Llanelly Railway and Dock Act;
1803: The Croydon, Merstham and Godstone Iron Railway Act;
1804: The Ellesmere Canal, Railway and Water Supply Act;
1805: The Surrey Iron Railway Act;
1808: The Kilmarnock and Troon Railway Act;
1809: The Bullo Pill Railway Act; the Gloucester and Cheltenham Railway Act; the Lydney and Lidbrook Railway Act;
1810: The Monmouth Railway Act; the Severn and Wye Railway and Canal Co. Act; The Severn Tunnel Act;
1811: The Hay Railway Act; the Llanvihangel Railway Act; the Penclawdd Canal and Railway or Tramroad Act; the Severn and Wye Railway and Canal Co. Extension Act;
1812: the Anglesey Railway Act;
1813-15: the Usk Tram Road;
1817: the Mansfield and Pinxton Branch;
1818: the Kidwelly and Llanelly Canal and Tramroad Company Act; the Kington Railway Act;
1819: the Leeds and Liverpool Canal Branch and Railway Act; the Plymouth and Dartmoor Railway Act;
1820: the York and North Midland Railway Act; and the Plymouth and Dartmoor Railway (Crabtree and Sutton Pool Branch) Act. [18]
All these and more received their Royal Assent in advance of the S&D at some great expense. Dawson explains that “getting such an Act was very expensive and required having a Parliamentary Agent and introducing a Private Members’ Bill. It would then have to go through both Houses and committee stage and, unless the Bill could demonstrate it was for the public good, could be thrown out at any stage. It was a big risk, but ultimately worth it. Even though the Middleton had an Act, it didn’t mean it was a public railway. It was owned by the Brandlings, to carry their coal to market. It wasn’t open to any other users, and wasn’t a public right of way.” [3]
Not the first railway, not the first to use iron, not the first railway to received Royal Assent through an Act of Parliament. …Was, then, the S&D the first public railway?
All the railways built in the 17th and 18th centuries were private railways, built over private land. Dawson notes that, “or a railway to be public – to be public right-of-way – that meant it needed an Act of Parliament. It also meant that, until 1825 when the law was changed, an Act was also needed to form a joint-stock company.” [3]
Lake Lock Rail Road was the first public railway in England. It opened in 1798. [132]
The first public railway in England was the Lake Lock Rail Road (LLRR), which opened in 1798. It linked collieries near Wakefield to the Aire & Calder Navigation. The LLRR qualifies as a public railway “because it was open to any user upon payment of a toll and because its capital was held in publicly traded shares. … The LLRR didn’t operate the railway itself, but rather allowed colliery owners to run their own trains on it, for which a toll was paid.” [3] The LLRR can claim another first! As well as being “probably the world’s first public railway, it was also owned … by the world’s first public railway company.” [21]
If you are unhappy with the idea of the LLRR being the first public railway, Then perhaps you would have to accept the Surrey Iron Railway as the next contender for the title – It required an Act of Parliament and incorporated in 1803 and fully open at the latest by 1806.
The first public railway carrying passengers – The Swansea and Mumbles Railway. [131]
The first passenger-carrying public railway in the United Kingdom was opened by the Swansea and Mumbles Railway at Oystermouth in 1807, using horse-drawn carriages on an existing tramline. [19][20]
The first public railway in Scotland was the Kilmarnock & Troon Railway (K&TR) which finally opened in 1812. Like the LLRR, it operated as a toll road, so that independent carriers could place wagons on it, and pay for the facility. [22]
We have established that the Stockton & Darlington was not the first public railway. Given what we have already discovered, our next question needs to be one about the intentions of the designers and directors of the Stockton & Darlington.
Was the Stockton & Darlington the first to be designed and built with mechanical operation in mind?
Here we have to start from an ambivalent position. … It depends! … Do you see hydraulic power as a form of mechanical power? If your answer is ‘Yes’, then the first length of railway to be operated mechanically is one known to have existed in Sweden in the late 1600s, where a waterwheel was employed to haul wagons up an incline. By the end of the 1700s, this technology was in use in Mas-sachusetts (on the South Hadley Canal) for a rail-based lift for canal boats linked with practice at Ketley, Shropshire at that time but assisted by power from a water wheel. There was another ex-ample at Bad Gastein in what is now Germany. [114][115: p87 & p337][116] The water-powered haulage of wagons up an inclined plane in the UK was initially limited to one location in Devon alt-hough the practice was used much later in North Wales. [115: p87-88]
If we set aside waterpower, perhaps the S&DR could stake a claim to be the first publicrailway designed to be worked mechanically. But it definitely was not the first to be operated mechanically. … (More of that later).
Setting aside waterpower, was the S&DR the first railway designed to be operated mechanically? … Again the answer is ‘No!’ … Early inclines were self-acting, water power could support this but, as Gwyn tells us, experience on the Ketley Incline led Reynolds, when carrying out a survey for a canal to connect the Oakengates collieries with the River Severn, to conclude that the wastage of water from locks “would be prohibitive, and after much hesitation and a public competition, he and the other shareholders resolved on a modification of the Ketley system, but with fixed steam engines on its three inclined planes, at Donnington Wood, Windmill Farm and Hay. Instead of locks at the summit as at Ketley, reverse railed slopes were constructed into docks permanently kept in water, and the cradles were equipped with overlapping wheels which ran on ledges on the docksides to maintain them in a horizontal position. The engines were used to draw boats and cradles out of the docks and to haul up the main incline if necessary. All three were built to a hybrid design by Reynold’s protégé, Adam Heslop. These were the first locations in the world where railed vehicles were moved by steam. They were operational by 1793.” [115: p89]
The top of the Hay Inclined Plane as drawn by Agustín de Betancourt. [136]Rendered isometric views of the 3D CAD model of the top area/winding house of the Hay Incline. [136]
This was followed by a significant section of the Lancaster Canal crossing the Ribble Valley. In 1803, steam-powered inclines were used “to connect the northern and southern ends of the Lancaster Canal. Its three inclined planes were each equipped with a high-pressure 6-horsepower 13-inch cylinder engine costing £350 and made by Summerfield and Atkinson, a local foundry which offered ‘patent steam engines’, and which also built the waggons. The first was installed in May of that year. In June, a 6-horsepower steam engine was installed on a plateway incline to haul spoil on the construction of London Docks.” [115: p89]
From the turn of the nineteenth century a number of shorter inclines were being steam-operated or steam-assisted. Examples include: an incline at Wellington Quay on the North bank of the Tyne (where George Stephenson was employed for a time), 1802/1803; an incline at Glynneath, connecting Aberdare Ironworks with Neath Canal, 1805; Bewicke Main (Urpeth) Colliery, 1805. [115: p89-91]
Three years prior to the opening of the Stockton & Darlington Railway George Stephenson designed and built another railway (the Hetton Colliery Railway) which, like the Stockton & Darlington “used a combination of stationary engines, rope haulages and level sections worked by locomotives.” [3] However, the Hetton Colliery Railway was a private, not a public railway:- “The Hetton Colliery Railway was an 8-mile (13 km) long private railway opened in 1822 by the Hetton Coal Company at Hetton-le-Hole, County Durham. … The Hetton was the first railway to be designed from the start to be operated without animal power, as well as being the first entirely new line to be developed by … George Stephenson.” [25]
Again, if we set aside hydraulic and discrete uses of stationary steam-power, it seems that the Stockton & Darlington was the first ‘public‘ (rather than ‘private‘) railway to be designed and built with steam power in mind. This, perhaps, feels as though we are making some headway. … The Stockton & Darlington was the first ‘public‘ railway to be designed and built with steam power in mind. … That is definitely a ‘first’ isn’t it. ….
Was the Stockton & Darlington the first railway to use steam power?
Surely, given that the S&DR was the first public railway designed for mechanical operation, that must mean that it was the first to use steam-powered engines. Mustn’t it?
Nothing is that simple!
The Middleton Railway in Leeds, was using steam power by 1812: “In 1812, it introduced the worlds first commercially successful steam locomotives which were designed and built in Leeds. These locomotives incorporated one of the most significant advances in the design of the steam locomotive – namely the twin cylinder engine which eliminated the need for the cumbersome flywheel employed on earlier single cylinder engined locomotives.” [24][34][35][36]
Incidentally, because it was the first railway to regularly use steam locomotives, the Middleton Railway also “lays claim to other firsts; they employed the first regular professional train driver in the world, a former pit labourer named James Hewitt. More tragically, a 13 year old boy called John Bruce was killed in February 1813 whilst running along the tracks – almost certainly the first member of public killed by a locomotive.” [36]
The Kilmarnock & Troon Railway first used steam power in 1817: in 1817 the Duke of Portland acquired a locomotive for the K&TR named ‘The Duke‘, which was the first use of steam locomotive power in Scotland. Its use was however discontinued in view of frequent breakages of the cast-iron rails on the line. [23] … Notes in The Railway Magazine of January 1950, suggest that this was only a hiatus in the use of this locomotive on the K&TR: In his ‘Story of the Life of George Stephenson‘, Samuel Smiles noted the discontinued use of ‘The Duke‘, but later, in his ‘Lives of the Engineers Volume III’ he appears to have secured further information, viz: “The iron wheels of this engine were afterwards removed, and replaced with wooden wheels, when it was again placed upon the road and continued working until the year 1848.” [43: p59][44: p139] This is supported by W. J. Gordon, writing in 1910, who says of the K&TR: “on it was placed the Killingworth engine with the chain gearing bought by the Duke of Portland from George Stephenson in 1817. The iron wheels of this remarkable engine broke down the cast-iron rails, for it thumped horribly, but, instead of being withdrawn from duty, as usually reported, it had its iron wheels taken off and replaced by wooden ones; and with wooden wheels it worked the traffic-mineral, goods and passenger-until 1848, for so many years in fact that it has been confused with or mistaken for the old St. Rollox, one of the first engines of the Glasgow & Garnkirk, which it in no way resembled.” [43: p59-60][45: p188-190]
Gordon appears to “have picked up and recorded a local railway tradition about the locomotive. It is difficult to credit that an old Killingworth-type engine was re-furbished in 1839 or later, after two decades of disuse, but this seems to be the only way of reconciling the various scraps of evidence. No trace has been found of any other Kilmarnock & Troon locomotive.” [43: p60]
It would be impossible to argue that the K&TR was built with steam power in mind, however, the K&TR was definitely the first use of steam-power on a public railway in Scotland. It could also be argued that this was the first use of steam power on a public railway in the United Kingdom. This was eight years before the Stockton and Darlington first used steam-powered trains.
However, neither of these could justifiably make a claim to be the first to use steam on a revenue earning railway. That accolade must go to the Merthyr Tramroad (otherwise known as the Pen-y-Darren Tramway and associated with the Pen-y-darren Ironworks, in Merthyr Tydfil) a bit earlier in the 19th century, on 21st February 1804 to be more precise, and to a locomotive designed by Richard Trevithick.
“In 1802, Trevithick took out a patent for his high-pressure steam engine. To prove his ideas, he built a stationary engine at the Coalbrookdale Company’s works in Shropshire in 1802, forcing water to a measured height to measure the work done. The engine ran at forty piston strokes a minute, with an unprecedented boiler pressure of 145 psi.” [26]
It seems that the experiment in Shropshire led to Trevithick experimenting with creating steam railway locomotives. He had already designed and built a road locomotive, ‘Puffing Devil‘. [27]
In 1802, the Coalbrookdale Company in Shropshire built a rail locomotive for him. [28] The death of a company workman in an accident involving the engine is said to have caused the company to not proceed to running it on their existing railway. [29]
The drawing above has been used as the basis of all images and replicas of the later ‘Pen-y-darren’ locomotive, as no plans for that locomotive have survived. It cannot be an exact sister of the later locomotive because there is a tunnel on the Pen-y-darren Tramway which would have required a lower chimney and a smaller flywheel. [3]
The S&DR was not the first railway to use a steam locomotive. However, the S&DR saw a step change in the use of steam power. … “Prior to 1825 no one had ever attempted to run a locomotive as far as George Stephenson did; the furthest they had ever run was a few miles.” [3] George Stephenson had such faith in steam power “that he designed and built a steam railway to be worked by locomotives not just for a couple of miles but for tens of miles” [3] – twenty six miles in all!
We have established that the S&DR was the first ‘public‘ (rather than ‘private‘) railway to be designed and built with steam power in mind. We have seen that while not the first to use steam-power, it was the first to be so confident in the new technology to believe that it could be used over significant distances.
We have noted, in passing, that the majority of different railways in use prior to 1825, were designed to carry coal or iron ore and some other ancillary forms of freight.
Can we say that the Stockton & Darlington was the first to carry fare-paying passengers over any significant distance?
Dawson tells us that “unofficial passenger carrying goes back into the 18th Century, on what were private mineral lines. The first public railway, as authorised by an Act of Parliament and which authorised the railway to do so was the Swansea & Mumbles Railway of 1807. This was a horse-drawn service, working to a timetable and, in 1812, saw the first railway station open in Swansea.” [3]
He continues: “The first passenger service on a public railway in Scotland was in 1813, on the Kilmarnock & Troon [Railway]. Again, it was horse-worked but like the Stockton & Darlington tickets could be bought from local inns along the line – as well as refreshments and parcels left there to be carried by the railway as well. There was a long history of public passenger railways before 1825. … Therefore, the Stockton & Darlington was tapping into an existing idea.” [3]
David Gwyn says: “In April 1807 the first known public railway passenger service was inaugurated, enabling tourists to enjoy the beauties of Swansea Bay along a plateway opened the previous year to carry limestone from the Mumbles to the copper smelters, and coal and manure in the opposite direction. Such services were soon found on railways in the border country, Scotland and the English West Country. Some carriers offered pleasure carriages for hire. Well-heeled people could now make railway journeys in order to enjoy attractive scenery, and humbler folk could travel by train to buy and sell – both Dr Griffiths plateway from the Rhondda to Pontypridd and the rail section of the Somerset Coal Canal to Radstock were used by women taking farm produce to market.” [115: p71-72]
Gwyn goes on to say that, “Carriers offering passenger services for wealthy tourists built specially designed vehicles, including long-wheelbase carriages on the Sirhowy, hauled at 6 or 7 mph, and on the Oystermouth.” William Chapman suggested in 1813 that ‘long carriages, properly constructed, and placed on two different sets of Wheels, viz. 8 in all, may take 30 or 40 people with their articles to market’.” A ‘market caravan’ on the Plymouth and Dartmoor had fireplaces to keep passengers warm, and there was also an open carriage with an awning. The Kilmarnock and Troon had a coach called ‘the Caledonia’, another called ‘the boat’, then one variously described as ‘an enormous Gypsy caravan’, ‘the Czar’s winter sledge’ and a ‘Brobdingnagian diligence’.” On other systems, humbler passengers rode on unconverted waggons, perhaps for the price of some beer money to the haulier or some other acknowl-edgement, or paid a fare to travel in a coal waggon which had been brushed out, and had planks inserted to serve as seats.” [115: p73]
Let’s tighten up the question. …
Was the S&DR the first to use steam for passenger trains?
Again we have to ask what criteria this should be judged by. Dawson says, “Yes, the opening train of the Stockton & Darlington was indeed pulled by a locomotive, and … included a purpose-built passenger carriage and passengers travelling in coal waggons, but that was a one-off event. It wasn’t the start of a regular steam-worked passenger service. Indeed, the Stockton & Darlington’s passenger service was horse-worked until 1833.” [3]
It was only after a number of years of operating passenger services that the economic potential for steam powered passenger services was recognised by the S&DR and it introduced its own steam hauled passenger services in 1833. It should be borne in mind that, “Although the S&DR made use of steam locomotives from its opening day, it can also be seen to represent a transitional stage of railway development in which stationary engines and horse-drawn vehicles were also utilised. Although [George Stephenson’s] ‘Locomotion’ represents a notable development [in] the earlier pioneering work of George Stephenson and others, it is fair to say that the subsequent work of Timothy Hackworth, the first Superintendent Engineer of the S&DR, proved the supremacy of the steam locomotive over other forms of motive power.” [37]
We have already noted in passing that passengers were carried on a number of earlier steam powered trains:
on 21st February 1804, Trevithick’s locomotive pulled a train of coal wagons which carried workmen (over 11 tons of coal, five wagons and 70 men) over the length of the line and it was also proposed to couple a private carriage begin the engine; [38][39]
Trevithick’s ‘Catch Me Who Can‘ of 1808 was pioneering in two ways – it was the first purpose-built passenger locomotive, as well as the first to haul fare-paying passengers; [33] and,
steam-powered trains on the Middleton Railway and associated lines also carried passengers, informally from very early days, formally by around 1834. [40]
We also have to note that the first regular steam-worked passenger service was to be established in May 1830 on the Canterbury and Whitstable Railway, which incidentally issued the first ever season tickets in 1834. [41] That line “was worked by a combination of stationary engines and a single locomotive – the now preserved Invicta, designed and built by Robert Stephenson & Co in Leeds immediately after Rocket.” [3]
In September 1830, the Liverpool and Manchester opened with a timetabled steam-powered passenger service. So, the S&DR cannot claim to be the first steam-powered passenger service.
If we accept that all of this is true, that the S&DR was not the first in any of the ways already discussed. What can we say about the S&DR which justifies the place it holds in the popular mind and in the eyes of technical specialists, journalists and railway enthusiasts around the world?
What is so special about the Stockton & Darlington Railway?
It is clear that the Stockton & Darlington Railway would not have existed without the, at least, two centuries of railway development which came before it. As Dawson says, “During those two centuries, crucial ideas and crucial technologies were worked out from the track to locomotives, to carrying passengers and legal structures. So, while the Stockton & Darlington wasn’t really the first of anything, it was the culmination of that previous development and evolution. It represents the bringing together and synthesising of existing ideas into a new concept. A public railway, authorised by Act of Parliament, to carry passengers, to use steam locomotives and use iron rails. In many ways it was, as Andy Guy noted in 2016, ‘better than the first’.” [3]
The Museum at Hopetown, Darlington says that, “The Stockton & Darlington was by no means the first railway, but its opening in 1825 marked a very significant step in the development of railways by bringing together two features for the first time:the concept of a public railway, available to all, for transport of passengers and goods; andthe use of steam locomotives.” [37]
On that first journey on 27th September 1825, made by the locomotive, ‘Locomotion No. 1‘, driven by George Stephenson, a large number of wagons filled with coal, flour and passengers were hauled along the line. There was a passenger carriage called ‘Experiment’ present which carried the railway’s directors. 300 passenger tickets were sold officially. However, a total amount of nearly 700 passengers were crammed into the wagons and the total load on that day was about 80 tons! [42]
There was clearly a sense that something momentous was happening that day and history has proven that to be the case.
And that initial success, together with that of the neighbouring Hetton Colliery Railway, meant that George Stephenson had demonstrable experience in the use of steam locomotives and places on which to trial his continued development of the technology.
As Dawson says, the S&DR “wasn’t the first. It wasn’t the first railway, it wasn’t the first steam railway, nor was it the first main line railway. But what it did do was put the railway squarely on the map and in the public consciousness showing what a steam-worked railway could do, laying the foundations for everything that came afterwards.” [3] It was a critical link in the chain of developments that brought about our modern railways. “The Liverpool & Manchester and the birth of main line railways as we know them simply wouldn’t have happened without the Stockton & Darlington Railway.” [3] It placed George Stephenson at the forefront of the development of railway technology and gave him space to test and modify locomotive design.
In that context, However, we must acknowledge the strength of debate underway between 1825 and 1829.
In this four-year period there was an intense debate about whether locomotive power or stationary engines were best.
Stephenson ascribed to the use of fixed engines where gradients were both short and steep. Others argued for the use of a variety of different fixed engines. The directors of the Liverpool & Manchester Railway challenged Stephenson’s proposals for the use of locomotives. This resulted in a number of studies taking place. The first of these took place on the S&DR and reported that rope haul-age would be suitable for the Liverpool & Manchester, with the proviso that it could cause problems at level crossings and at junctions.
A second study based at the Bolton & Leigh Railway and at the Middleton Railway also found in favour of the use of stationary engines for the Liverpool & Manchester spaced at no more than 2-mile intervals, with goods and passengers changing from one system to another at locations dictated by the gradient or by the length of rope in use. That study saw the value of locomotives for light loads but estimated that the rate per ton per mile for heavier loads would be 2/3 of a penny cheaper with stationary engines rather than locomotives.
There was a worldwide proliferation of the use of stationary engines from the second half of the 1820s into the 1830s.
The complexity of use of the stationary engines over significant distances, the necessary transshipment of goods and passengers to suit the technology eventually brought the director of the Liverpool & Manchester to the conclusion that provided locomotives could meet specific criteria then they should be used for the longer lower gradient length (35 miles) of the railway.
There is little doubt that the experience of working the S&DR and the rapid development in loco-motive technology which resulted gave Stephenson and Hackworth a clear advantage over any competition. But it must be remembered that the ‘ordeal’ at Rainhill was as much about the choice between stationary engines and mobile locomotives as it was about which was the best locomotive.
Both Hackworth and Stephenson entered locomotive for the Rainhill Trials Stephenson’s expertise, honed by experience on the S&DR and built on a fastidious attention to detail which saw all parts of Rocket tried and tested as part of a component review, resulted in Rocket significantly out-performing all its competitors (including Hackworth), but perhaps of greater significance, the debate over the use of locomotives or stationary engines had been conclusively resolved in favour of the locomotive.
Locomotive design was developing so quickly that after 1831, Rocket became design-expired and was only used on engineers’ trains and for other secondary duties! [137] [115: p144-171]
To summarise, … the S&DR:
Was a significant step forward on a journey to technological advancement and in the history of transport. The S&DR made a critical contribution to the history of the world, not just to the development of railways. It:
Demonstrated the Feasibility of Steam Railways as a means of transport of goods and passengers over significant distances. It proved that steam-powered trains could be a practical and profitable means of transport, not just for coal but also for passengers.
Inspired Global Growth: The S&DR’s success led to a surge in railway construction both in Britain and around the world, as other countries sought to replicate its model. Initially, it gave confidence to a number of investors in railways. After the opening of the S&DR, people knew that they would be investing in proven technology, not risking their money on what was no more than an experiment.
Brought About Technological Innovation: The S&DR pioneered various railway technologies, including signaling systems, timetables, and station layouts, which became standard practices in the railway industry.
Had a Significant Economic Impact: The railway transformed the Tees Valley into an industrial powerhouse, facilitating the transport of goods and people, and contributing to the growth of new industries and towns.
Had a Manifest Social Impact: The S&DR made travel more accessible to people of all classes, leading to increased social mobility and cultural exchange.
Created a Legacy: The S&DR is considered the “birthplace of the modern railway system” and its legacy continues to be celebrated through museums, heritage sites, and ongoing research.
By the time Richard Trevithick died in 1833 the first main lines were extending across Britain. By the time of George Stephenson’s death in 1848, the railway mania was in full swing. Soon the world would be crisscrossed by parallel iron rails, and nothing would ever be the same again. Places once considered perilously distant could be reached in hours.
However, if the S&DR had not opened in 1825, somewhere else would have taken its place as the birth-place of modern railways within a matter of a few short years. It was however, the tipping point when one excellent technology of tramway and tramroad gave way to what we now call the railway..
Industries would soon transport their goods across the globe with ease.
Industrial output grew exponentially. … Cities were reshaped now that people didn’t have to live within walking distance of work.
Businesses could be more productive than ever before with reliable means of communication. News of events in far-off places could be on the breakfast table the following day.
Railways would drive wars and revolutions.
Railways also made going on holiday accessible to ordinary people.
Railways were celebrated in literature music and film.
The new need for consistent timekeeping across the country meant that Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) was adopted as standard – even time itself would be spiked to the iron way.
And here we are, 200 years later in a world that Trevithick and Stephenson would barely recognize. Perhaps the best way to end would be with a quote attributed to Stephenson found in Smile’s biography of George Stephenson and told to Smile by John Dixon. …
“The time will come when railways will supersede almost every other form of conveyance in this country when mail coaches will go by railway and railroads will become the great highway for the king and all his subjects. I know there will be great and almost insurmountable difficulties to be encountered but what I have said will come to pass as sure as you live.” [George Stephenson]
References
Andrew Wilson; The Stainmore Route and the Eden Valley Line; in Rex Kennedy (ed.); Steam Days, Red Gauntlet Publications , Bournemouth, Forest, January 2002, p13-30.
J. S. Jeans; Jubilee Memorial of the Railway System. A History of the Stockton and Darlington Railway and a Record of Its Results; Longmans, Green & Co., London, 1875. (later 1974 ed., p74).
M. J. T. Lewis; Railways in the Greek and Roman World, in A. Guy & J. Rees, J. (eds.); Early Railways. A Selection of Papers from the First International Early Railways Conference; (PDF); Newcomen Society, London, 2001, p8–19; via https://web.archive.org/web/20110721083013/http://www.sciencenews.gr/docs/diolkos.pdf, accessed on 26th March 2025.
David Gwyn and Neil Cossons; Early Railways in England: Review and summary of recent research; Historic England, Discovery, Innovation and Science in the Historic Environment Research Report Series No. 25-2017; via
“The first railways in England probably date, at earliest, from the second half of the 16th century and were associated with mines where German-speaking miners were employed. Smith-Grogan 2010 suggests that several Cornish rutways might date back to the 1550s and be associated with Burchard Cranich and Ulrich Frosse. The West-Country mining engineer Sir Bevis Bulmer (1536-1615) was familiar with Agricola’s De Re Metallica (Skempton 2002), and another possible literary conduit is Sebastian Munster’s Cosmographia Universalis, published in German in 1544 and in Latin in 1550. This includes a woodcut of a hund on flanged wooden rails in a mine at Ste Marie/Markirch in Alsace (Lewis 1970, 51).” [12: p20]
G. Smith-Grogan; Rutways in Cornwall; in Early Railways 4, Fourth International Early Railways Conference; Newcomen Society, London, 2010.
J. Longworth and P. Rickard; Plateways, Steel Road Rails, Stoneways, and Rutways in Australia; in Early Railways 6, Sixth International Early Railways Conference; Newcomen Society, London, 2016.
“Designed and built by Matthew Murray, four of these locomotives were built for use in Leeds, where they lasted – despite one blowing up – until the early 1830s. Three were built for use around Newcastle-upon-Tyne; three under licence for use near Wigan, and one for service in South Wales. A working model was sent to the Tsar of Russia and copies were built in modern-day Belgium and Poland. This means not only were they the first locomotives in commercial use, but the first built in any number and the first to be used in many countries around the world.” [3]
The design of this early locomotive address one particular problem associated with these early locomotives: “Colliery manager John Blenkinsop focussed on a particular problem with locomotives on cast-iron rails, specifically that an engine light enough to run on the tracks without breaking them would have trouble with the weight of the wagons and the often steep gradients of the track. Blenkinsop relaid the track on one side with a toothed rail – patented in 1811 – and approached engineer Matthew Murray to design a locomotive with a pinion to mesh with the rail. The resulting Salamanca became the first commercial steam locomotive to operate successfully in 1812.” [36]
Maurice W. Kirby; The Origins of Railway Enterprise: The Stockton and Darlington Railway 1821–1863; Cambridge University Press. 2002.
In the 19th century members of the Society of Friends travelled to attend regular meetings and came to know Quakers elsewhere, this leading to marriages and business partnerships. The Society of Friends published guidance on conduct that included honesty in business matters, and this gave Quakers the confidence to invest in the dealings of a devout member. [50: p52, 79–80, 128]
“In the mean time, a bill is to be brought into Parliament to carry a rail-way from Bishop Auckland to Darlington and Stockton. Mr. Stevenson … has been called … to give an opinion as to the best line. The work is estimated at 120,000l., a great part of which is already subscribed.” [53: p223]
Thomas Thomson, ed.; Durham Coal Field; in Annals of Philosophy. Vol. XIII.; Baldwin, Cradock and Joy, London, March 1819.
“From [1825] on, an abundance of maps, plans, diagrams and technical drawings were created to enable railways to be planned, constructed and operated; to be changed, developed and regulated; to attract business and passengers; and to provide railway staff with a range of specialist tools.” [56]
Diana Collecott; The Arrival of Quakerism in Teesdale; in The Quaker Line: A study to understand the importance of the Quaker community to the Stockton & Darlington Railway; compiled by the Friends of the Stockton & Darlington Railway (FSDR), supported by Historic England, 2022/3, p7-14; via https://www.sdr1825.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/The-Quaker-Line-Alan-Townsend-Ed.pdf, accessed on 14th July 2025.
L. T. C. Rolt; George and Robert Stephenson: The Railway Revolution; Penguin, 1984.
Malleable iron rails cost £12 10s and cast iron rails £6 15s per ton at that time, but malleable iron rails could be less than half the weight for the same strength. [59: p74]
“Smiles [62: p160] states that early tramroads had rails 4 ft 8 in (1,422 mm) apart, but Tomlinson [49: p82–83] questions this, stating that the most common gauge of the early tramroads and waggonways was about 4 ft (1,219 mm), and some, such as the Wylam Waggonway, had the rails 5 ft (1,524 mm) apart. The gauge of the S&DR was given in early documents as 4 ft 8 in (1,422 mm), but the distance between the rails was later measured as 4 ft 8+1⁄2 in (1,435 mm), and this became the standard gauge used by 60 per cent of railways worldwide. The difference of 1⁄2 inch (13 mm) is a mystery.” [54][63: p75][64]
“The Skerne bridge was shown on the reverse of the Series E five-pound note that featured George Stephenson, issued by the Bank of England between 1990 and 2003.[66] Allen [48: p22] and Tomlinson [49: p93–95] state that Bonomi was directly appointed by the directors after Stephenson had ignored suggestions to consult him, but Rolt [59: p75] does not mention this.” [54]
“Smiles [62: p166] has an image of this railway coach and describes it as ‘a somewhat uncouth machine’, even though the Illustrated London News had discounted in 1875 an earlier publication of Smiles’ image, stating that coach used on the opening day was a similar to a road coach. [72] Tomlinson [49: p109–110] describes the coach as having a table, cushioned seats and carpets, and criticises the Smiles image for the lack of roof seats, having the wheels outside the coach frame and says that the drawing in Smiles does not look like a vehicle that was built for £80 (approximately £8300 in 2023). [73]
Railway Jubilee at Darlington; Illustrated London News. 2nd October 1875, p342.
UK Retail Price Index inflation figures are based on data from Gregory Clark; The Annual RPI and Average Earnings for Britain, 1209 to Present (New Series); MeasuringWorth, 2017, via https://measuringworth.com/datasets/ukearncpi accessed on 15th July 2025.
“These waggons (known as wagons after about 1830) [75] were designed to carry a Newcastle chaldron (pronounced ‘chalder’ in Newcastle) of coal, about 53 long cwt (5,900 lb; 2,700 kg). This differed from the London chaldron, which was 36 bushels or 25+1⁄2 long cwt (2,860 lb; 1,300 kg). [49: p120][76]
A. A. Jackson; The Railway Dictionary: An A-Z of Railway Terminology; Alan Sutton, 1922, p322.
Bill Griffiths; A Dictionary of North East Dialect; Northumbria University Press. 2005, p30.
An imperial or long ton is the same as 1.016 metric tonnes and 1.120 short tons, the US customary unit.
Compare Tomlinson (49: p141–142) and Rolt (59: p143).
Robert Young; Timothy Hackworth and the Locomotive; Locomotive Publishing Co., London, 1923 – republished by The Hackworth Society/The Book Guild Ltd., 2000 in PB.
A. N. Mackay, ed.; A History of North Eastern Railway Signalling; North Eastern Railway Association, 2016.
Francis Whishaw; The Railways of Great Britain and Ireland Practically Described and Illustrated (2nd ed.); John Weale, London,1842.
“Passenger accommodation was sometimes classified as inside and outside following the practice on stage-coaches; express trains with premium fares were known as first-class trains. The S&DR introduced third class accommodation on some trains in 1835 as people unable to afford a second class ticket had been walking along the tracks.” [93]
Charles Edward Lee; Passenger Class Distinctions; in the Railway Gazette, London, 1946.
Bradshaw’s Monthly General Railway and Steam Navigation Guide; March 1843, p16
A. Guy; Better Than First: the Significance of the Stockton & Darlington Railway, 1821-30;(unpub paper given at the Friends of the S&DR Conference June 2015).
José Ignacio Rojas-Sola & Eduardo De la Morena-De la Fuente; The Hay Inclined Plane in Coalbrookdale (Shropshire, England): Geometric Modeling and Virtual Reconstruction; Symmetry 2019, Volume 11, No. 4, p589; https://doi.org/10.3390/sym11040589; via https://www.mdpi.com/2073-8994/11/4/589, accessed on 20th August 2025.
M.R. Bailey & J.P. Glithero; The Engineering and History of Rocket; National Railway Museum, London and York, 2000.
The featured image for this article, above is an FS Series 320 0-6-0 (030 in Italian notation) steam locomotive which was used in the early days of operation on the southern section of the Ventimiglia-Cuneo line, before the North and South sections could be linked. The locomotive depicted is FS3620 and carries a nameplate – ‘Terni’. 201 locomotives of this Class were built between 1904 and 1908. [8]
In the first four articles about the line from Cuneo to the sea we covered the length of the line from Cuneo to Breil-sur-Roya. These articles can be found here, [9] here [10] here, [11] and here. [12]
I also want to acknowledge the assistance given to me by David Sousa of the Rail Relaxation YouTube Channel https://www.youtube.com/@RailRelaxation/featured and https://www.railrelaxation.com and particularly his kind permission given to use still images from rail journeys that he has filmed on the Cuneo-Ventimiglia railway line. [35][55]
South of Breil-sur-Roya a junction allows direct access to Ventimiglia and to Nice. The map below shows the two routes as they existed prior to the alteration of the border between France and Italy after the Second World War.
The lines Nice to Tende and Ventimiglia to Tende in the period from 1928 to the Second World War, before the annexation, in 1947, of St-Dalmas de Tende and Piene to France. [40]
This article follows the line South from Breil-sur-Roya to Ventimiglia in two parts: the first as far as Airole and the second from Airole to Ventimiglia. ….
1. The Line South from Breil-sur Royato Airole
This drawing/map shows the two routes heading South from Breil-sur-Roya. [40]
As with the line immediately to the North of Breil-sur-Roya, the works to the South were constructed by the French. Both of the lines heading South from Breil-sur-Roya entered tunnels just a short distance South of Breil.
Breil-sur-Roya to Piene. [22]A colourised postcard view of Breil-Sur Roya Railway Station looking North through the station site in advance of the official opening in 1928. This colourised image was shared on the Stura-Cuneo Facebook Page on 20th February 2020, (c) Public Domain. [29]Breil-sur-Roya station during its very early operation (1928-35), before electrification, with numerous passenger carriages standing idle. The passenger building is in the background; in the foreground are the buildings on the second platform, the only ones today significantly reduced in height and length, publisher Frédéric Laugier, (c) Public Domain. [30]Breil-sur-Roya Railway Station at the height of its development, with electrification completed (1935), with the passenger building, the large freight yard filled with wagons, and the concrete sheds with arched vaults. Those in the background still exist but are used for non-railway purposes. The Breil Ecomuseum is now located on the north side, half-hidden by the foliage of the tree in the foreground. The photograph was taken from the hillside to the Northwest of the station site and faces Southeast, (c) Public Domain. [30]After the war, the line to Nice was reopened in 1947, but the station, reduced to the simple terminus of a secondary section, was greatly simplified, removing almost all the sidings (the long straight lines of which can still be made out). In the background, the line to Fontan still features the electrification poles (removed from the rest of the station), but it was naturally abandoned and remained there until its reconstruction in the 1970s. In the 21st century, platform 2, which had been removed at the time, has been restored, the buildings on the second platform have been scaled down, and the third platform has been eliminated. The turntable, which still exists, is part of the Ecomusée, publisher Lapie à Saint-Maur, 1955, (c) Public Domain.[31]Breil-sur-Roya Railway Station in 2013, (c) Gilles Tagadaand licenced for reuse under a Creative Commons Licence (CC BY-SA 3.0). [32]The southern end of the railway station site in Breil-sur-Roya. Two lines leave the station heading South-southwest. [Google Maps, August 2025]
South of the station adjacent parallel bridges cross the Voie de la Première Dfl and Vallon de la Lavina (the Lavina Bridge).
Looking East under the railway bridges (the Lavina Bridge) along Voie de la Première Dfl. [Google Streetview, October 2008]Looking West under the railway bridges (the Lavina Bridge)along Voie de la Première Dfl. [Google Streetview, October 2008]This extract from the OpenStreetMap mapping shows the close correlation of the two different routes over the first fe kilometres. The short red lines are the locations of tunnel mouths. [13]A short distance to the South the two lines can be seen to be separating both geographically and in level. This view looks Northeast with the station off to the left. [Google Streetview, October 2008]The view South from the cab of a Ventimiglia-bound train. Again, the separation in level is quite marked. [55]At the same location, this view looks Southeast. Both lines enter a tunnel just to the South. One tunnel mouth is visible on the left of the image at a lower level. The other tunnel mouth is behind the vegetation on the right of this image. [Google Streetview, October 2008]The two tunnel mouths. On the left, that of Gigne Tunnel, on the right, that of Caranca Tunnel. Left for Ventimiglia, right for Nice! [54]
The approach to the junction from Ventimiglia. The line from Nice is at the higher level on the left. [35]
The mouth of Gigne Tunnel (1188 metres in length), seen from the cab of the Ventimiglia-bound service. The tunnel is S-shaped. Trains heading South turn to the East within the tunnel and then, close to the East Portal, begin to turn to the South again. [55][1: p126]
The view North from the North Portal of Gigne Tunnel, seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
The route of this tunnel crosses twice under the Caranca tunnel on the Nice line. [1: p126]
Just beyond the East Portal of Gigne Tunnel the line begins to curve South again. [55]
The East Portal of Gigne Tunnel, seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
The North Portal of Sanfurian Tunnel (260 metres in length) was in deep shade when this image was taken from the cab of a Ventimiglia-bound train. [55]
The view Northwest from the same portal of Sanfurian Tunnel. [35]
The view South from the mouth of Sanfurian Tunnel. Note the high retaining walls to the right of the image. [55]
The South Portal of Sanfurian Tunnel, seen from the North end of Eboulis Viaduct. This viaduct has eight 18 metre stone arches and nine 7 metre stone arches. [35][1: p126]
The view from the North along the Route de Ventimiglia with the railway viaduct alongside the road. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
Eboulis Viaduct facing South. [55]
Eboulis Viaduct looking North, seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
Eboulis Viaduct before the construction of the road between it and the River Roya. The quality of this image is not perfect but it is still possible to make out the South portal of Snfurian Tunnel towards the right of the image. [49]
The view along the E74/D6204 from the South with the viaduct to the left of the road and the river to the right below the road. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
Looking South over Bancao Viaduct. [55]
Looking North along Bancao Viaduct. [35]
Bancao Viaduct on the line from Breil-sur-Roya to Ventimiglia is close to the D6204 on this extract from OpenStreetMap. The line to the West is the line from Breil-sur-Roya to Nice which is at a much higher level. [14]
Looking West from the D6204/E74, a small culvert close to the road is dwarfed by the bridge carrying the line to Ventimiglia which in turn is dwarfed by the viaduct carrying the line to Nice. [Google Streetview, April 2008]
The bridge carrying the line to Ventimiglia is also known as the Bancao Ravine Bridge. [1: p126]
The length of the line South of Bancao Viaduct. The two rail line are still running in parallel, only beginning to separate significantly at the bottom of this extract from Open StreetMap. Cottalorda Tunnel begins towards the bottom of this map extract. [15]
The line can only be seen fleetingly from the road.
It runs in front of the terracotta-coloured building near the centre of this image. Railings at the edge of a retaining wall supporting the line can be seen to the right of the image. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
The North portal of Cottalorda Tunnel (297 metres long). [55]
Turning through 180°, this is the view North at the same location. [35]
Just a glimpse of the tunnel mouth and the associated retaining wall can be seen from the D6204/E74. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
The view South from the southern portal of Cottalorda Tunnel. [55]
The southern portal of Cottalorda Tunnel. [35]
Looking back towards Breil-sur-Roya and the mouth of Cottalorda Tunnel. Note the arcaded retaining wall on the left, typical of the retaining walls on this length of the line. The D6204 runs alongside and below the line to the right. [35]
This next length of the line from the South portal of Cottalorda Tunnel runs immediately adjacent to the E74/D6204. [16]
This smaller image, looks South along the D6204/E74. The railway can be seen adjacent to, but above the road. To the West side of the line, large retaining walls create space for the line on the steeply graded valley side. {Google Streetview, July 2014]
A little further South the Hydroelectric Plant is now visible. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
This View looks North. The building beyond the trees is Breil’s Hydroelectric Power Station (below). [35]
Now just beyond the Power Station , again looking South with a high retaining wall above the railway which sits a few metres above road level on the right. Three arcades carrying the line are followed by the three stone arches of the Riou Viaduct. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
Construction work on the Italian length of the line in the lower Roya (Roia) Valley began in Ventimiglia. Banaudo et al have chosen to follow the line from South to North to reflect the way this section of the line was constructed. We continue to follow the line from North to South.
The length of the line from the border at Piena (Piene) to Airole was completed before the first world war but traffic along this part of the line had to wait for completion of the length of the line in French territory. The Italian authorities decided that services would commence only between Ventimiglia and Airole. That length is covered later in this article.
The international border at the time of construction was just to the North of Piena (Piene). That border line remained the same through the interwar years. Services North from Airole via Piena to Breil-sur-Roya had to wait until 1928 and the opening of the full line.
The Riou Viaduct (three 6.25m masonry arches) was the location of the international boundary. Banaudo et all tell us that the point that the line crossed the boundary is marked by the letters I and F engraved in a stone on the deck of the structure. [1: p125]
The Riou Viaduct straddled the centuries old border between Genoa and Savoy which became the border between Italy and France. This view looking South along the D6204/E74 shows the arcade retaining wall (3 bays) followed by the three-arch viaduct. [Google Streetview, July 2014]This view looks North along the D6204/E74 towards Breil-sur-Roya. The three arches of the Riou Viaduct are on the left of the image. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
Immediately to the South of the Riou Viaduct, Piene (Piena) Station was built as a frontier station below the village of Piena-Alta which, Banaudo et al tell us, was for centuries the outpost of the Genoese republic and the border with the States of Savoy. [1: p125-126]
Close to the road border post at Piena-Bassa, the “Italian administration decided to establish a station intended for police and customs control operations. There were three platform faces, a two-story passenger building and a customs clearance hall of the same size for goods, comprising a warehouse, offices and two apartments on the upper floors. The site was hemmed in by the tunnel to the South, the French border to the North, the mountainside to the West, and the Roya River to the East, necessitating the construction of the station, cantilevered over a masonry gallery supported by seven arches, above the SS 20 roadway.” [1: p126]
This photograph was taken in 1925 facing upstream.. It shows Piene (Piena) Railway Station sitting at high level, above the Ventimiglia road, (Collection of J. L. Taylor) (c) Public Domain. [26]
Also facing up stream, this image shows the structures at this location in 2006, (c) Markus Schweiss and licenced for reuse under a Creative Commons Licence, (CC BY-SA 3.0). [33]
Since the photograph above was taken a netting protection has been applied to the principal buildings at rail level. This photograph taken in 2019 also faces upstream, (c) Eugenio Merzagora/Structurae and made available for reuse under their non-commercial licence. [34]
This view looks South along the D6204/E74. it is taken a couple of hundred metres South of the Riou Viaduct where the road passes what was Piene Railway Station building. The site was tight and in order to accommodate the necessary station buildings, they were built over the road. [Google Streetview, October 2008]
Piene Railway Station (closed) seen from the cab of a Southbound train. [55]
Piene Railway Station (closed) seen from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
Writing about the length of the line between Ventimiglia and the border at Piena (Piene), Banaudo et al say: “In the lower Roya Valley, the seven tranches of the Ventimiglia – southern border section were successively awarded in 1908, 1910, 1911, 1912, and 1913. Despite the lower altitude, the route was as difficult as on the purely Alpine section of the line, with steep gorges and terrain that offered highly varied resistance to earthworks: unstable marly limestone, very hard black limestone, clayey marl, schist, sandstone, etc. Of the 17,260 m route, nearly half way to be in tunnels, with nineteen structures totaling 8,259 m, fifteen bridges and viaducts representing sixty-four masonry arches, as well as various secondary structures for crossing waterways and rural roads.” [1: p118]
Piene Railway Station to Airole Railway Station. [22]
South of Piene (Piena) a series of structures carry the line over or through the obstacles in its path:
• the Fromentino Tunnel, 645 m long; • a viaduct with three 10 m arches; • the Arme Tunnel, 333 m long; • a viaduct with four 10 m arches; • the Agrie Tunnel, 820 m long; • the Fanghetto tunnel, 419 m long, extended by a gallery (the post-WW2 border was established at the North end of this tunnel); • the Sardinesca Tunnel, 820 m long; • a single span arch bridge over the Tron valley.
These are all illustrated below.
The North Portal of Fromentino Tunnel (645 metres in length) in shade. [55]
The view from the North portal of Fromentino tunnel. [35]
It is just possible to see the tunnel mouth above, when looking up from the road. [Google Streetview, October 2008]
The view South from the D6204/E74 above the South portal of Fromentino Tunnel. Before reaching the Arme Tunnel, the line crosses a 3-viaduct of three 10 m span arches. The stone parapets of the viaduct can be seen below the top rail of the parapet immediately in front of the camera. [Google Streetview, September 2010]
The view South from the cab of a Ventimiglia-bound train at the southern portal of Fromentino Tunnel. The viaduct parapets are in the foreground. [55]
Turning round, this is the view of the South Portal of Fromentino Tunnel. [35]
Looking toward the northern portal of Arme Tunnel (333 metres long) which again is in shade. [55]
A view looking north along the railway from the road immediately above the North portal of Arme Tunnel. The parapets of the viaduct can again be seen between the two tunnel mouths. [Google Streetview, September 2010]
A similar view back towards Breil-sur-Roya from the cab of a Northbound service the mouth of Arme Tunnel. [35]
This next length of the line is heading South-southeast. Arme tunnel is at the top of this extract from OpenStreetMap. The line bridges (on a four-arch viaduct) a tributary of La Roya before being swallowed by Agrie Tunnel.
The view South from the mouth of Arme Tunnel. [55]
Turning through 180°, this is the South portal of the Arme Tunnel. [35]
The railway and the bridge are just visible over the edge of the road, looking East. The bridge is a viaduct of four 10 m spans. [Google Streetview, September 2010]
The northern portal of Agrie Tunnel (820 metres in length). [55]
The view from the cab of a Northbound service leaving Agrie Tunnel. [35]
A better view is obtained from the road above the North portal of Agrie Tunnel. This view shows the viaduct mentioned above. [Google Streetview, September 2010]
This is the view from the cab of a Southbound train at the South portal of Agrie Tunnel. The train is travelling at 68 km/hour and the still image from the video is much less distinct. [55]
A similar view but from the road. A metre high wall separates the road and the railway. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
Turning through 180°, we see the mouth of the Agrie Tunnel from the cab of the Northbound service. [35]
A similar view from the road. It is at this location that we cross into Italy! The border was adjusted as part of reparations after WW2. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
At high speed the video stills are less distinct. This is the northern mouth of the Fanghetto Tunnel which is in shade. This tunnel is 419 metres in length and trains cross the border between France and Italy as they enter it. [55]
A much more distinct view from the road of the mouth of Fanghetto Tunnel. [Google Streetview, July 2014]
Here, we are looking from Italy into France in this view back towards Breil-sur-Roya from the mouth of the Fanghetto Tunnel. [35]
The southern end of the Fanghetto Tunnel is galleried/arcaded with low level arches letting in light before the tunnel mouth is reached. [55]
The arcades close to the southern mouth of Fanghetto Tunnel seen from the East side of the valley. [Google Streetview, July 2021]
The view along the line from the southern portal of Fanghetto Tunnel. [55]
The southern portal of the Fanghetto Tunnel. [35]
With the Southbound train now travelling at 75 km/hr, small structures (like this accommodation bridge) whizz by and, certainly in this direction with the bridge face in shadow, it is impossible to make out any detail.. [55]
The structure is seen in better light, from the cab of the Northbound service. [35]
The northern mouth of Sardinesca Tunnel (820 metres long) again in shadow and indistinct because of the speed of the train. [55]
Looking back towards Breil-sur-Roya from the cab of a Northbound train at the mouth of the Sardinesca Tunnel. [35]
The view South beyond the southern portal of Sardinesca Tunnel. The parapets of a single span arch bridge are visible close to the camera. [55]
Turning through 180° we get a look at a footbridge over the line just outside Sardinesca Tunnel. [35]
The same footbridge seen from the SS20 road. the arch bridge over the Tron, a tributary of the Roya, can be seen on the left of the image. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
An extract from Google’s satellite imagery showing the same location. Note the tunnel mouth and adjacent footbridge in the top-left quadrant of the photograph. [Google Maps, August 2025]
Next comes the Olivetta-San-Michele Station and the San-Michele Tunnel (133 m long).
A very short distance South of the footbridge is Olivetta San Michele Railway Station. [Google Maps, August 2025]
Olivetta San Michele Station, seen from the cab of the Ventimiglia-bound service. [55]
A better railside view of the station building at Olivetta San Michele, this time from the cab of a Northbound train. [35]
The station building seen looking South from the SS20/E74 road. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The station building seen from the East, (c) Pampuco and licenced for reuse under a Creative Commons Licence (CC BY-SA 4.0). [36]
The view ahead along the line towards Ventimiglia from the cab of the Southbound train as it pulls out of Olivetta San Michele Station. The tunnel ahead is San Michele Tunnel which is 126 metres in length. [55]
A view, looking South from the SS20, of the northern mouth of San Michele Tunnel with an Italian Locomotive heading into the tunnel (I may well need correcting on this) is shown in more detail below… It appears to be a Belgian locomotive (SNCB) No. 7336 with the name, ‘Mexico’. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
This picture it taken just a short distance to the South of the image above. It shows a side-on view of the same locomotive. I would not expect to see this locomotive at this location! [Google Streetview, August 2021]
This is SNCB 7304 – the image is provided by Wikipedia. The family resemblance with 7336 is manifest. The Class 73 locomotives formed the backbone of the SNCB/NMBS shunting locomotive fleet. [20]
Class 73 locomotives were built in three batches: 7301-7335 during 1965–1967, 7336-7375 during 1973-1974 and finally 7373–7395 in 1976–1977. [20]
This is the view North through the station site as seen from the cab of a Northbound service at the North postal of the San Michele Tunnel. [35]
Looking out from the Southeast portal of San Michele Tunnel, the line ahead crosses Roya IV Bridge which is 126 metres in length and then enters Mantici Tunnel which is 604 metres long. [55]
One hundred metres further South and turning through 180°, this is the view across Roya IV Bridge towards the San Michele Tunnel. Note that the road tunnel is just above the railway tunnel, although on a different line. [35]
The view from the road above the Southeast portal of San Michele Tunnel. The mouth of Mantigi Tunnel (604 metres long) can be seen at the end of the railway viaduct. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
A very short distance along the road a somewhat better view of the viaduct. [Google Streetview, August 2021] More views of the viaduct can be seen here, [17] here, [18] and here. [19]
Roya IV Bridge was also known as the San-Michele Viaduct. It was made up of five 15 metre arches. [1: p125]
The Mantigi tunnel has a short section where it is very close the the surface of the ground above, Banaudo et al, tell us that this allowed the provision of a vertical ventilation shaft. [1: p125]
Trains travelling South to Ventimiglia crossed the viaduct and ran on through Mantigi Tunnel. Airole Railway Station was originally on a large plateau beyond the Southeast portal of Mantigi Tunnel.
The original location of Airole Railway Station. The substantial passenger building remains. The walls of one other building can be seen to the Southeast of the passenger facilities. [Google Maps, August 2025]
Banaudo et al tell that “Airole station was located in an olive grove to the North of the village, in the only place where the shallower slope of the left bank of the Roya allowed the construction of a retaining wall to support all the railway infrastructure: the passenger building, three platform tracks and two freight tracks with a goods shed and high platform, as well as a water column for the locomotives.” [1: p121]
The station was built in 1914 and remained operational until, sadly, the station site was abandoned in the 1970s when it was replaced by a single platform halt in the centre of Airole. [25]
At the southern end of Mantigi Tunnel, trains enter a passing loop (Airole Loop), which is all that is left of the original railway station, before entering another tunnel! [55]
Looking back towards Breil-sur-Roya from within the passing loop. Immediately to the North of the loop, Northbound trains plunge into the Mantigi Tunnel. [35]
Looking North from the cab of a Northbound train approaching the old railway station building. It is evident from both these pictures that there were originally sidings at this location – confirmation that the station facilities at Airole were once quite significant. [35]
At the end of the passing loop trains enter Madonna Tunnel (249 metres long). [55]
Looking back towards Breil-sur-Roya from the portal of Madonna Tunnel. The passing loop is still provided at this location as there is no room at the present Airole Railway Station for more than a single track. [35]
Leaving Madonna Tunnel trains immediately pass under a local road bridge which appears as not much more than a silhouette as eyes get used to the light on leaving the tunnel. [55]
Airole Railway Station seen from the cab of a Ventimiglia-bound train passing under the accommodation bridge shown above. [55]
The view West from the bridge which carries Via Giacomo Matteotti over the line. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
Turning to face East, this is the present Airole Railway Station as seen from Via Giacomo Matteotti. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
A Northbound train is stationary at Airole Railway Station. This is the view ahead, West towards Olivette San Michele. The road over bridge sits a few metres closer to the station than the mouth of Madonna Tunnel. [35]
Airole Railway Station seen from the cab of a northbound service entering the station from the East. [35]
A similar view but this time the camera is on Via G. Biancheri which crosses the railway line above the West portal of Airole Tunnel (153 metres in length). [Google Streetview, August 2021]
This extract from Google’s satellite imagery shows the village of Airole which sits over the line. Airole Tunnel curves to the Northeast. Its West Portal is bottom-left in this image, its Northeast portal is top-right. [Google Maps, August 2025]
The view Southwest from the cab of a Ventimiglia-bound train at the Northeast portal of Airole Tunnel. [55]
The Southwest portal of Para Tunnel (754 metres long). [55]
Looking Southwest from Via Luigi Trucchi the Northeast portal of Airole Tunnel can be seen below the village of Airole. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The view from Via Nazionale of the short bridge (Airole Bridge, one 10 metre arch) which sits to the Southwest of the mouth of Para Tunnel. The stonework of the tunnel portal can be seen above and to the right of the viaduct. Para Tunnel is over 747 metres long. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
This is the view back towards Airole Village and Railway Station from the mouth of Para Tunnel. White fencing sits on top of the parapet walls of Airole Bridge. [35]
Para Tunnel curves round to the Southeast. This is the view from the cab of the Southbound train as it exits Para Tunnel and crosses La Para II viaduct (four 10 metre arches). [55]
The viaduct mentioned above can be glimpsed from Via Natzionale. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
This is the view back into the mouth of Para Tunnel. [35]
The Northwest portal of Pian de Para Tunnel. The tunnel is 184 metres long. [55][1: p125]
A view of the Northwest portal of Pian de Para Tunnel from Via Nazionale. There is a single-span arch bridge carrying the line close to the tunnel mouth. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The next length of the line as it appears on OpenStreetMap and annotated with the tunnel names. [21]
The Southeast portal of Pian de Para Tunnel seen from the cab of the Northbound train. [35]
Immediately to the Southeast of the tunnel portal Southbound trains cross La ParaI Viaduct. The Viaduct appears to have three 5 metre spans. This image looks Northeast from Via Nazionale. [1: p125]
The Southeast portal of Pian de Para Tunnel can be seen in the top-left of this image, looking North from a point a little further along Via Nazionale. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The Southbound train is now travelling at over 80 km/hr. This is the portal of the next tunnel on the route – Gambetto Tunnel (173 metres in length. [55] [1: p125]
Turning through 180°, this is the view back towards Airole from the mouth of the Gambetto Tunnel. [35]
Gambetto Tunnel opens out onto the next bridge over La Roya – Roya No. III Bridge. [55] This structure is also known as the Lamberta Viaduct, it is made up of three 14 metre arches and two 10 metre arches. The gallery beyond the bridge is the route of the modern SS20. [1: p125]
Turning through 180°, this is the mouth of the Gambetto Tunnel from the cab of a Northbound service. [35]
With the railway running South-southeast towards Bevera and Ventimiglia, it alternates between tunnels and viaducts switching sides of La Roya (Roia) river. [23]
The Roya No. III bridge is also known as the Lamberta Viaduct. [1: p125]
The Roya No. II bridge is also known as the Colombo Viaduct. [1: p125]
A view of Roya No. III bridge from the bridge carrying Via Nazionale of the Roya to the West of the railway. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The old road, Via Nazionale passes under the five stone arches of La Roya No. III bridge – three 14 metre arches and two 10 metre arches. The concrete gallery allows light into the tunnel carrying the modern SS20/E74. [Google Streetview, September 2011]
A view of La Roya No. III bridge from the Via Nazionala further to the East along the valley. [Google Streetview, September 2011]
Southbound trains then plunge into Lamberta Tunnel which is 750 metres in length. [55]
Turning through 180°, this is the view across Roya III bridge from the mouth of the Lamberta Tunnel. [35]
Leaving Lamberta Tunnel at its southern end, Southbound trains immediately crossed La Roya again on Roya No. II bridge. [55] The bridge is also known as the Colombo Viaduct. [1: p125]
Turning through 180° we see the Lamberta Tunnel Portal. [35]
Once across La Roya on No. II bridge trains ran on into Colombo Tunnel. [55]
Looking back across La Roya from the mouth of the Colombo Tunnel. [35]
Roia (Roya) No. II Bridge, seen from the viaduct carrying the SS20/E74 across the river. The old road down the valley (Via Nazionale) can be seen crossing the river at a lower level. The northern portal of Colombo Railway Tunnel can be seen on the left of this image. [Google Streetview, August 2021]A similar view, looking West from the Via Nazionale. [Google Streetview, September 2011]The view from the West of Roia No. II bridge, looking East. The tunnel mouth visible in this photograph is the southern portal of the Lamberta Tunnel. [Google Streetview, September 2011]
Looking South across Roia (Roya) No. 1 bridge (also known as the Bocche Viaduct) from the South portal of Colombo Tunnel. [55]
Roia No. I bridge, seen from the West on Via Nazionale. [Google Streetview, September 2011]Roia No. I bridge, seen from the East on Via Nazionale. The tunnel mouth visible on the left of the image is the northern portal of Delle Bocche Tunnel. [Google Streetview, September 2011]
The northern tunnel mouth of Delle Bocche Tunnel. [55]
Looking back from the Delle Bocche tunnel mouth across the Roia No. 1 bridge. [35]
Banaudo et al tell us that the length of the Roia (Roya) Valley that we have just traversed is known as the ‘Bocche’, “the wild gorges of the Roya which for a long time represented an abstacle to communications between the Ligurian lands of the Republic of Genova and the Piedmontese domain of the Kingdom of Sardinia. It was only in 1893that the … road from Ventimiglia to Breil was completed … after lengthy construction work hampered by the difficult terrain and the reluctance of the military authorities. The railway tamed this gorge through an uninterrupted succession of tunnels and viaducts.” [1: p121, 125]
Delle Bocche Tunnel (927 metres long) ends at the top of this OpenStreetMap extract. There is a short bridge which carries a length of the line before Southbound trains enter d’Allaveri Tunnel which, although it appears as one tunnel on the map extract is actually two tunnels with a very short open length in between. The Aqueduct illustrated on the map passes under the railway in that opening in pipes, (Pont sur les conduites forcées de la centrale hydroélectrique de Bevera). The first length of the tunnel is named d’Allaveri Tunnel (69 metres long), the second length is known as Serro Soprano Tunnel (245 metres long).
Once beyond these tunnels, Southbound trains have a clear run down to Bevera Railway Station. [24]
Looking South from the South portal of Delle Bocche Tunnel. [55]
Looking back to the North, this is the South portal of Delle Bocche Tunnel. [35]
A glimpse of the line from a local road (Localita Madonetta) at a point a couple of hundred metres South of the South portal of Dell Bocche Tunnel. The camera is facing Northeast. [Google Streetview, November 2011]
A short distance further South the line bridges a shallow valley and crosses a minor access road. This is the East elevation of the Varese Viaduct (three 8 metre arches) seen from Via Comunale di Varase. [Google Streetview, November 2011][1: p121]The western elevation of the same structure, seen from the Southwest. [Google Streetview, November 2011]
A little further Southwest the line is carried on a low bridge under another minor road. This view looks West from Via Comunale di Varase. [Google Streetview, November 2011]
The same structure seen from the West. [Google Streetview, November 2011]
Continuing South the line is carried alongside the River Roia (Roya) and above Via San Rocco on retaining walls and a series of nine 8 metre arches. The arches comprise one structure known as the Allaveri Viaduct. The North portal of d’Allaveri Tunnel can be glimpsed just to the right of centre in this photograph. [Google Streetview, November 2011]
The North portal of d’Allaveri Tunnel. This and the next tunnel are in the vicinity of the hamlet of Varese and the Bevera Hydroelectric Power Station. [55]
The view North from the cab of a Northbound train at the North portal of d’Allaveri Tunnel. [35]
This extract from Google’s satellite imagery shows the two tunnels at this location and Bevera’s Hydroelectric power plant which is immediately adjacent to the railway. It is the white-roofed building just above the centre of this image.
D’Allaveri Tunnel is the very short tunnel to the North of the Hydroelectric plant (71 metres in length). Serro Soprano Tunnel (244 metres long) extends South from the building to a point near to the bottom of this image.
The grey area at the bottom of the image (surrounding the tunnel mouth) is a series of greenhouses. As shown below.
[Google Streetview, July 2019]
An overexposed photograph showing the view South from the southern portal of d’Allaveri Tunnel. The Aqueduct which carries water under pressure to Bevera’s hydroelectric plant can be seen on the right. The line bridges the penstock on three 5 metre arches before southbound trains enter Serro Soprano Tunnel ahead. [55]
Another over-exposed view, this time facing North at the North portal of Serro Soprano Tunnel. The southern mouth of d’Allaveri Tunnel can be seen ahead.[35]
Looking South towards Bevera at the mouth of Serro Soprano Tunnel. [55]
The South portal of Serro Soprano Tunnel. [35]
An accommodation bridge North of Bevera Railway Station, seen from the cab of the Southbound service. [55]
The accommodation bridge, seen from above. [Google Maps, August 2025]
The same structure seen from the cab of the Northbound train. [35]
As we head South towards Bevera Railway Station, the valley of the Roia widens significantly and we enter the suburbs of Ventimiglia, of which Bevera is one part. Beverea Railway Station was built with a large “classically designed passenger building, two platform faces and and two freight tracks with a goods shed and loading platform.” [1: p121] In the 21st century Bevera is a single platform halt.
A Southbound train approaches Bevera Railway Station. [55]
Bevera Railway Station seen from above. [Google Maps, August 2025]
Bevera Railway Station building and forecourt seen from the Northwest. [Google Streetview, October 2010]Bevera Station building seen from the South adjacent to a low underpass under the railway. [Google Streetview, July 2019]A second underpass just a little further to the South. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The Northbound service sits at Bevera Railway Station which is a single platform halt. [35]
The Southbound train, stationary at Bevera Railway Station. [55]
Bevera to Ventimiglia. [22]
Looking North into the Bevera Station site
South of Bevera Railway Station the railway bridges the Bevera River (Torrente).
The bridge over the Bevera Torrente. The river is quite a significant tributary to the Roia (Roya). [Google Maps, August 2025]The railway bridge over the Bevera, seen from the main road to the East. The viaduct has four16.35 metre arches and spans the Bevera close to its confluence with the Roia. [Google Streetview, August 2021][1: p119]
The same bridge, seen from the Northwest. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The view North along the line from the cab of a Northbound train as it crosses the bridge over the Bevera River. [35]
The line runs on to the South on embankment through the suburbs of Ventimiglia.
The bridge over Via Madeira seen from the East. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The same bridge seen from the West. [Google Streetview, August 2021]
Looking back along the line towards Bevera Railway Station from Pont Bevera (Viadotto Autoporto). [Google Streetview, August 2021]
Facing towards Ventimiglia this image taken from the cab of the Ventimiglia-bound service looks through Pont Bevera (Viadotto Autoporto). [55]
Facing North towards Bevera and looking under Pont Bevera (Viadotto Autoporto). [35]
Looking ahead along the line towards Ventimiglia Railway Station from Pont Bevera (Viadotto Autoporto). [Google Streetview, August 2021]
The North portal of Maneira Tunnel (171 metres in length) is in shadow and difficult to make out from the cab of the ventimiglia-bound train. [55][1: p119]
Turning through 180°, this is the view North from the cab of a Northbound service as it leaves the North portal of Madeira Tunnel. [35]
The view South from the South portal of Maneira Tunnel. [55]
Turning through 180°, this is the South portal seen fr
The line continues on embankment with low height underpasses to provide vehicular access under the line as shown below. [Google Streetview, August 2021]…
In between the second and third underpasses shown above the line passes through d’Isnardi Tunnel (168 metres in length). The North portal is so much in shade that the view from the cab of the Ventimiglia-bound service does not provide any detail. [55] That is the first image below…
The North portal of d’Isnardi Tunnel is so much in shade that no details can be made out from the cab of the Ventimiglia-bound service. [55]
Turning through 180° this is the view North from the North portal of the tunnel. [35]
The view South from the South portal of d’Isnardi Tunnel. [55]
Turning through 180° the South portal is seen from the cab of a Northbound service. [35]
The next few images come from above the level of the line further to the South – the first two from alongside to the West of the line and then from over bridges. ….
The first two of the images above look back along the line and then forward towards Ventimiglia Railway Station from Via Peglia. [Google Streetview, November 2011] The second pair of images look back and forward along the line from the bridge carrying Via Gallardi over the line. [Google Streetview, August 2021] The final par of images look back (across a curve in the line) and then forward along the line from the E80 (close to the toll booths). In the first of this pair of images the bridge carrying Via Gallardi over the line can be seen. [Google Streetview, July 2019]
The next two images show the bridge carrying Via Gallardi over the line. [55][35]…
This next pair of photos show the overbridge which carries the E80. [55][35] …
The next batch of photos continue towards Ventimiglia Railway Station. …
Two further underpasses are shown in the first two images above, the second pair of images are taken from the bridge carrying the SS20 over the line, the first looks back to the West towards the point where the double-track line from Nice begins to run alongside the single-track line from Cuneo. The second looks forward from the same bridge towards Ventimiglia Railway Station. The last two images are underpasses that the 3 lines cross on their way East. [Google Streetview, September 2024]
A cab level view of the diverging tracks seen in the third of the six views in the gallery above. The double-track line heading towards Nice diverges to the left. It is just approximately 6 kilometres to the international border. [35]
The next pair of images show the bridge carrying the SS20 as seen from cabs on services to and from Cuneo. [55][35] The first faces towards Ventimiglia, the second towards Bevera. …
The next three images show the final approach into Ventimiglia Railway Station. [55] …
The middle image above shows a shunter idling in a siding alongside the main running lines – TS D100 Shunter [Vossloh G1000 BB]. The Vossloh G1000 BB is a class of off-centre cab diesel-hydraulic B’B’ 4 axle locomotives built by Vossloh in Kiel since 2002. The class is based upon the standard Vossloh locomotives design, and they are a higher powered development of the Vossloh G800 BB which were produced mainly for the Austrian Federal Railways, with a 1.1 MW (1,500 hp) MTU engine replacing the 0.8 MW (1,100 hp) Caterpillar engine in the G800; as a result the front engine compartment is enlarged, whilst other features: bogie frame and overall dimensions remain the same. [27]
Another view of the TS D100 Shunter [Vossloh G1000 BB], this time from the cab of the Cuneo-bound service. [35]
Looking Northwest from the cab of a Cuneo-bound train about to depart from Ventimiglia Railway Station. [35]
Ventimiglia Railway Station is on a Northwest to Southeast axis. [Google Maps, August 2025]
A postcard view of Ventimiglia taken from the hillside to the Northeast of the Railway Station which features in the foreground of the image. [44]
Banaudo et al write that “the single track of the Col de Tende line runs alongside the Nice double track for a few hundred metres. [Initially] they crossed the Roya River together on a six-span metal viaduct, which was soon replaced by a new structure with eight 17-metre stone arches. Immediately beyond the bridge, the two routes separate and the Cuneo route climbs up the right bank of the river, at a gradient of 13 mm/m, the valley is still relatively wide. A bundle of three service tracks called Scalo Roia is located to the left of the main track. The Isnardi tunnel (168 m long) and Maneira tunnel (171 m long) precede a four-arch viaduct (with 6-metre arches).” [1: p119] This description assumes that the line is followed West out of Ventimiglia Railway Station.
Banaudo et al comment thatwhile construction was just beginning between“Breil and the southern border, the work begun in 1908 by the Italian companies from the coast was nearing completion. While awaiting the connection to France, the FS decided to operate the Ventimiglia-Airole section (11.970 km), which entered service on 16th May 1914. The service was provided by three round trips, including two local passenger trains and one mixed train, which covered the entire route in about thirty minutes uphill and twenty-five minutes downhill. Traction was provided by three-axle 030 locomotives with separate tenders, Group 320 (formerly the 3600 of the Rete Mediterranea), based to the newly created Savona depot.” [1: p142]
In France, WWI caused the cessation of all work on the line and in the aftermath of the conflict, “the resumption of construction proved very difficult. The PLM’s construction department received only meager allocations from the state, with priority funding being allocated to the recovery of the disaster-stricken regions of the northeast.” [1: p138]
On site, the years of inactivity had allowed serious deterioration, particularly of the tunnels on the unopened line. Following a three-day inspection tour of the entire line, the French decided to begin work once again.
The contractors made a significant investment in manpower and materials at the beginning of 1920 but discovered that rather than dealing with the PLM, the works would be directly funded by the government. The government determined that the budget for the work on French soil would be reduced from 104 to 75 million Francs and indicated that the maximum spend in 1920 would be 17 million Francs. This inevitably led to redundancies and to slower progress of the works. [1: p140]
When the authorities indicated in June 1920, that “only 700,000 Francs of credit remained to complete the year, … the elected officials of the Alpes-Maritimes immediately rushed to Paris to meet with representatives of the Ministry and the PLM management. Following discussions, a new budget was allocated by the State for railway construction. The PLM had a budget of 41 million Francs, 25 of which were allocated to the Nice-Cuneo line. Work could [continue], but the engineers and contractors in charge of it would have to take into account the irregular arrival of funds until the end when organizing their work.” [1: p140]
Work on the Nice to Breil-sur-Roya line and the remaining length of the line between Ventimiglia and Breil ran in parallel. The increased budget meant competition to attract staff was strong and people had to be hired from Italy, Spain, Portugal and Morocco. Stonemasons were in particularly short supply. We will probably see more about what this meant for the work when we follow the line from Breil-sur-Roya to Nice.
Banaudo et al note that in the early 1920s the line was opened between Ventimiglia and Airole for passengers and was used also to supply the French construction site on the length of the line between Breil-sur-Roya and Piena (Piene).
“From Breil to the southern border, the [railbed/formation]was passable by 1921 and the final track was immediately laid, while the FS did the same between Airole and Piena on the section removed during the war. On30thJanuary 1922, the Italian and French rails were finally connected on the Riou bridge, and the Borie company obtained from then on the authorization to directly route its materials from Nice to Breil by rail.” [1: p142]
Once the line opened fully between Ventimiglia and Cuneo, the line “retained the Ventimiglia-Airole service created before the war, while on the Cuneo San-Dalmazzo-di-Tenda line, the timetable included three daily three-class buses and a seasonal train running on public holidays from July to September. The 58 km journey took 2 hours 30 minutes in the north-south direction and 2 hours 10 to 15 in the opposite direction. This service included one less return journey than in 1915, because a fast Cuneo Nice bus connection was introduced in 1921 following an agreement between the FS and the Compagnia Generale dei Tramways Piemontesi (CGTP), to avoid the inconvenience of transhipment while waiting for the railway to be fully operational.” [1: p143-146]
In December 1923 it was agreed that on the length of line between the two borders, “all trains … would be hauled by the FS, including maintenance trains; in the event that they had to be exceptionally handled by a French locomotive, the latter would be accompanied by a pilot from the FS. The San-Dalmazzo Piena section would be equipped with Morse-type telegraph devices. The protection signals for Breil station on the Fontan-Saorge and Piène sides would be Italian, but the departure signals for all directions would be the PLM-type. The organization of customs controls between San-Dalmazzo, Fontan-Saorge, Breil and Piena was also [agreed].” [1: p146]
Banaudo et al provide a significant series of photographs of the construction work on the lines between Cuneo, Nice and Ventimiglia which takes up a large proportion of Volume 1 of Les Trains du Col de Tende. The photographs and drawings are predominantly from the French lengths of the line. [1: p152-311] It is a very significant collection of images which stand as a superb tribute to the amazing work of the various contractors employed on the line.
Opening of the line from Cuneo to Ventimiglia to passenger traffic had to wait for the completion of all of the French construction work. “Finally in October 1928 the lines were all completed – the celebrations must have been fantastic events. At last the small towns and villages along the route had access to jobs, schools and universities, cultural activities, hospitals … everything the cities had to offer.” [39]
The next article in this short series will look a the line heading out of Breil-sur-Roya towards Nice. It can be found here. [5]
References
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 1: 1858-1928; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 2: 1929-1974; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Jose Banaudo, Michel Braun and Gerard de Santos; Les Trains du Col de Tende Volume 3: 1975-1986; FACS Patrimoine Ferroviaire, Les Editions du Cabri, 2018.
Franco Collidà, Max Gallo & Aldo A. Mola; CUNEO-NIZZA History of a Railway; Cassa di Risparmio di Cuneo, Cuneo (CN), July 1982.
Franco Collidà; 1845-1979: the Cuneo-Nice line year by year; in Rassegna – Quarterly magazine of the Cassa di Risparmio di Cuneo; No. 7, September 1979, pp. 12-18.
Stefano Garzaro & Nico Molino; THE TENDA RAILWAY From Cuneo to Nice, the last great Alpine crossing; Editrice di Storia dei Trasporti, Colleferro (RM), EST, July 1982.
SNCF Region de Marseille; Line: Coni – Breil sur Roya – Vintimille. Reconstruction et équipement de la section de ligne située en territoireFrançais; Imprimerie St-Victor, Marseille (F), 1980.
Stanley Jenkins tells us that “The opening of the Inverness & Rossshire Railway between Inverness and Dingwall on 11th June 1862 brought the benefits of rail transport to a prosperous farming area in Ross & Cromarty. The line was completed throughout to Invergordon on 25th March 1863, while a series of subsequent extensions eventually resulted in the creation of the Highland Railway’s ‘Far North’ line between Inverness and Wick. Inevitably the 161½ mile ‘Far North’ line omitted large numbers of places that would have benefited from direct rail links, and for this reason several branch-line schemes were put into effect during the latter part of the 19th century.” [1: p48]
“The Black Isle peninsula, between the Beauly and Cromarty Firths, became the focal point for two such schemes, only one of which was successful.” [1: p48]
Wikipedia tells us that “The Highland Railway was surprised when in 1889 the Great North of Scotland Railway (GNoSR) proposed the construction of a railway to Fortrose, … The GNoSR operated a network from Aberdeen and the nearest place to Inverness served by it was at Elgin, some distance away. The branch would have been detached from the owning railway, but running through the Black Isle it would have made a junction with the Highland Railway at Muir of Ord. A ferry operation from Fortrose to Ardersier, on the south side of the Moray, was included in the plans. Ardersier was then known as Campbelltown, and a railway branch to it was included. Two other schemes striking into Highland territory were proposed at the same time, elevating Highland Railway discomfort about its competitive position.” [2][3]
“The two companies had been adversaries for some time, and in 1883 and the following years there had been a state of continual warfare over junctions, frontiers and running powers. … The Highland saw at once that if this branch were built, it would be easy for the GNoSR to demand running powers into Inverness to reach its branch, and in that way the rival company would have gained access to the Highland’s stronghold.” [2]
After considerable ‘argument’ between the two companies, the GNoSR and the Highland Railway each submitted Bills to the UK Parliament for a line to Fortrose.
It was the Highland Railway’s scheme which received Parliamentary consent on 4th July 1890. Jenkins tells us that it was for a “16 mile branch line between Muir of Ord, on the ‘Far North’ line, and the fishing port of Rosemarkie. The gentle topography of the Black Isle ensured that the proposed line could be built with relative ease, and on 1st February 1894 a single line was opened as far as Fortrose a distance of 13 miles 45 chains. The final section between Fortrose and Rosemarkie was never built, the terminal station at Fortrose being deemed a suitable railhead for the surrounding district.” [1: p48]
“The Fortrose branch provided useful transport facilities … on the South side of the Black Isle, but it was felt that better facilities were needed on the North side of the peninsula. The 1896 Light Railways Act offered a solution to this local transport problem, and on 1st August 1902 a Light Railway Order was obtained for construction of a 19 mile line between Conon, on the ‘Far North’ line, and Cromarty. Work began at the Cromarty end, but subsequent progress was painfully slow, and extensions of Time Orders were obtained in 1907, and again in 1910. … About six miles of track was actually laid between Cromarty and Newhall, but all work was suspended in 1914 on the outbreak of World War I. At that time, construction work was in hand on a further two miles of line, but little had been done on the remaining eleven miles of line to Conon. The track was lifted around 1915 for use in the war effort, leaving the earthworks and other engineering features of the unfinished light railway in a derelict condition.” [1: p49]
“If the Cromarty & Dingwall Light Railway had been completed it would have had stations at Alcaig Ferry, Culbokie, Drumcudden, and Newhall. Other halts may have been opened once the line was in operation, while there were also suggestions that the route might be extended south-westwards from Cromarty to Rosemarkie and Fortrose, thereby creating a scenic ‘coastal’ route around the Black Isle that would have had considerable potential as a tourist attraction. Unfortunately the changed economic conditions after World War I meant that schemes of this kind were no longer viable, and the Fortrose branch was therefore left in splendid isolation as the only completed railway in the Black Isle area.” [1: p49]
“The Fortrose route was worked as a feeder branch for the ‘Far North’ line, and as such it was moderately-successful. Like other Highland Railway branch lines it was normally worked by small tank locomotives such as the Dübs 4-4-0Ts. Other engines seen on the line were Drummond’s well-known 0-4-4 branch-line tanks.” [1: p49]
The Route from Muir of Ord to Fortrose
The extracts below from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1904, published in 1906 cover the site of Muir of Ord Railway Station. [6] Jenkins tells us that “Muir of Ord – the junction station for branch services to Fortrose – was opened on 11th June 1862 when the initial section of the Highland ‘Far North’ line was brought into use between Inverness and Dingwall.” [1: p49]
“The station was orientated from North to South, with its main station building on the down, or northbound side. The track layout was relatively complex, with sidings on both sides of the running line and a lengthy crossing loop.The main goods yard, with accommodation for coal, livestock, furniture, machinery, and general-merchandise traffic, was situated to the south of the platforms on the down side. One of the yard sidings passed through a goods shed, while others were used mainly for coal or other forms of wagon-load traffic. Further sidings were available on the up side, and one of these gave access to a 50ft diameter locomotive turntable.” [1: p49]
Wikipedia tells us that “The station is 13 miles 4 chains (13.05 mi; 21.0 km) from Inverness, between Beauly and Conon Bridge, and is the location of the sole remaining passing loop on the single line between Dingwall and Inverness.” [5]
“The station building and platform canopy were erected in 1894, [5][7] 32 years after the station itself opened. [8] Passenger services on the branch ceased on 1 October 1951, but the branch remained open for freight until 13 June 1960. Muir of Ord station was closed on 13 June 1960 but reopened in 1976, on 4 October.” [5][8]
“After the railway bridge across the River Ness washed away in February 1989, isolating the entire network north of Inverness, Muir of Ord was chosen as the location for a temporary depot, from which the stranded rolling stock could operate the service to the highland communities which depended on the line.” [5][9]
“In November 2015, work commenced on a new A862 road bridge at the northern end of the station.” [5][10]
The project cost £3.7 million and was completed in the Summer of 2017. [11]
This ESRI satellite image supplied by the NLS shows the station site after the reconstruction of the raod bridge. [6]
Wikipedia tells us that “in the 21st century, both station platforms have modern waiting shelters and benches, with step-free access. There is a car park and bike racks adjacent to platform 1, along with a help point near to the entrance from the car park.” [5]
“As there are no facilities to purchase tickets, passengers must buy one in advance, or from the guard on the train.” [5]
“The station has a passing loop 32 chains (700 yd; 640 m) long, flanked by two platforms which can each accommodate a ten-coach train.” [5][12]
“On 11th June 1862 the Inverness and Ross-shire Railway opened their line between Inverness and Dingwall. It included a station at the village of Tarradale but the company decided to name it after the nearby cattle tryst (market), Muir of Ord. Eventually the name Muir of Ord was applied to the surrounding area.” [14]
“On leaving Muir of Ord, branch trains diverged eastwards, and having, executed a full 90 degree turn the route maintained its easterly heading for about two miles.” [1: p49]
A further extract from the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1904, published in 1906. This extract shows the brach leaving the main line just North of the Station and heading East. [17]The same area as shown on ESRI satellite imagery provided by the NLS, in the 21st century. [17]As the line curved to the East it was crossed at level by a track. [17]
Additional sidings on the north side of the station provided locomotive facilities for the branch engine. The main engine siding gave access to a 50ft turntable, while a ‘kick-back’ spur ran into a single-road engine shed; another siding served as a coaling road. The station building was a typical Highland Railway timber-framed structure which was similar to its counterparts at Hopeman and Burghead, albeit with a second cross-wing at the left-hand end (when viewed from the platform). The resulting building was thus an ‘H-plan’ structure with a central block flanked by two cross-wings.” [1: p51]
In the 21st century, the track has been replaced by a modern estate road – Highfield Circle. The road entering bottom-centre is Fairmuir Road, that leaving top-right is part of Highfiels Curcle. These two roads approximately follow the line of the old railway. [17]A short distance to the East the line was in cutting and bridged by a minor road. [17]ESRI satellite imagery from the NLS shows the realigned road in the 21st century. The approximate line of the old road (blue) and railway (red) have been superimposed on the image. The modern road is named ‘Balvaird Road’. [17]A short distance further East the line was crossed by a farm access raod at a level-crossing. [18]The same location in the 21st century as shown on Google Maps satellite imagery. The lane is now named ‘Hawthorne Road’. [Google Maps, March 2025]Looking North along Hawthorne Road, across the line of the old railway (marked approximately by the red line). Google Streetview, September 2021]Looking West from Hawthorne Road along the line of the old railway towards Muir of Ord. The line of the railway is gated by the single-bar gate and it ran from there towars the distant trees. [Google Streetview, September 2021]A footpath follows the line of the old railway to the East of Hawthorne Road. [Google Streetview, September 2021]
From Hawthorne Road eastwards a public footpath follows the line of the old railway. There is a leaflet of walks for the area around Muir of Ord. One of the four walks included in the leaflet includes a length of the old railway. [19]
For a short length the old railway formation has been ploughed back into farmland. The next image looks back along the line of the old railway from a point further to the East.
After passing under the accommodation bridge, the old line ran east in cutting through what is now Spital Wood. Then, ” curving east-north-eastwards,” Jenkins tells us, “the railway continued to Redcastle (3 miles 58 chains), where the single-platform station was equipped with a full range of accommodation for goods, passengers, and livestock traffic.” [1: p49]
“Beyond [Redcastle], trains climbed towards the 250ft contour, the line’s modest summit of around 260ft above mean sea level being sited near the next station at Allangrange. Situated some 5 miles 39 chains from the junction, Allangrange was another fully-equipped station with provision for a range of goods traffic.” [1: p49]
The line continued in an East-northeast direction towards Allangrange Railway Station. [28]The same area as shown on the 21st century NLS ESRI satellite imagery. [28]Looking Southwest along the old railway towards Redcastle Station from the minor road towards the left of the satellite image above. [Google Streetview, April 2011]Looking Northeast along the old railway towards Fort from the minor road towards the left of the satellite image above. [Google Streetview, April 2011]Looking Southwest along the line of the old railway from the A832. [Google Streetview, March 2023]Looking Northeast along the line of the old railway from the A832. [Google Streetview, July 2008]Again, still heading East-northeast, trains drew closer to Allangrange Railway Station. [29]The same area in the 21st century. [29]
The line curved round from an East-northeast direction to and easterly alignment before entering Allangrange Railway Station.
From the point at which the old line crossed another lane, this is the view back towards Redcastle Station. The tree at the centre of the image on the horizon stand immediately adjacent to the line of the railway. [Little can be seen looking towards Allangrange Railway Station from the minor road as the rail alignment close to the road is overwhelmed by vegetation. [Google Streetview, September 2021]The line curved round to run in an easterly direction through Allangrange Railway Station which had a reasonable sized goods yard to the West of the passenger facilities. [30] The same location in the 21st century. The major road at the West end of the old station site is the modern A9 dual carriageway. [30]This is the view East along the line of the old railway from the A9 dual carriageway. [Google Streetview, March 2023]Noe looking East from the A9 through the trees and through the site of Allangrange Railway Station. [Google Streetview, March 2023]Looking West from the old A9 into Allangrange Station site. [Google Streetview, March 2023]Looking East from the old A9 towards Fortrose. [Google Streetview, March 2023]
Beyond Allangrange Station, and heading east-north-eastwards again, “the single-line railway descended towards Munlochy (8 miles 2 chains) which, like the other intermediate stations on the Fortrose branch, was fully-equipped for all forms of goods traffic.” [1: p49]
Three images of Munlochy Railway Station can be seen online at http://www.ambaile.co.ukhere, [53] here [54] and here. [55] Kind permission has been given to reproduce two of these images in this article.
Munlochy Railway Station looking Northeast. [53]Munlochy Railway Station, looking Southwest along the platform. [54]Looking Northeast through the station site from Cameron Crescent. [Google Streetview, September 2021]Again, looking NorthEast through the station site along Station Court. [Google Streetview, September 2021]Looking back Southwest from Millbank Road (B9161) through the station site. [Google Streetview, March 2023]Looking Northeast along the line of the old railway from Millbank Road (B9161) towards Fortrose. The A842 is just to the left. [Google Streetview, March 2023]
“From Munlochy the route passed over a small underline bridge, and with the A833 (later A832) road maintaining a parallel course to the left, Fortrose trains reached Avoch Station (11 miles 25 chains).” [1: p49]
“From Avoch, the line continued north-eastwards for a further … three miles to its terminus at Fortrose where, some 13 miles 45 chains from Muir of Ord, journeys came to an end in a surprisingly large station.” [1: p49-51]
“Fortrose had just one platform on the up side, with a run-round loop to the north and a four-siding goods yard to the south. One of the goods sidings passed through a goods shed, while another served a loading bank; a spur at the west end of the goods yard formed a short headshunt.” [1: p51]
Fortrose Railway passenger station building had “the booking hall and general waiting-room … in the centre part of the building, while the booking office and toilets were housed in the ends. The timber structure was clad in American-style vertical matchboarding, with thin cover strips affixed at each join to produce a ‘ribbed’ effect.” [1: p52] The centre block was recessed between the cross-wings to create a roofed waiting area at the front of the station.
Additional photographs of the Station can be found on the www.ambaile.co.uk website here, [73] here [74] and here. [75] Kind permission has been given to reproduce these photographs here.
Fortrose Railway Station from the end of the platform in 1912, showing the station building. A branch train is in the platform and a locomotive is on the turntable in the background. [73]Fortrose Railway Station seen from the Northeast (adjacent to the buffers). Llocomotive No. 57594 is described in the notes for the next image. Here it is about to be turned to take its train back to Muir of Ord. [74]Locomotive No. 57594 has just been turned and is being readied to haul the last train from Fortrose. The locomotive is an ex-Caledonian ‘812’ Class 0-6-0, built in August 1900 as CR No. 856, becoming LMS No. 17594 and finally BR No. 57594. It was withdrawn in December 1962. [75]
Decline and Closure
The Fortrose branch was relatively successful. Its passenger services were maintained throughout the LMS era. But the line “became increasingly vulnerable to road competition after World War II, and for this reason its passenger services were withdrawn with effect from 1st October 1951. Goods traffic lingered on for a few more years, but the end came in 1960, with the line being closed to all traffic from 13th June of that year.” [1: p52]
References
Stanley Jenkins; Highland Railway Minor Lines: 2; in Rex Kennedy (ed.); Steam Days; Red Gauntlet Publications, Bournemouth, Dorset, January 2002; p48-57.
A significant proportion of the August 1925 edition of The Railway Magazine [1] was dedicated to coverage of the Centenary celebrations at Darlington. Given the short timescale between the event and the publication date of the August issue of the magazine (?late July?), and given that modern digital techniques were in no way available, the achievement of publication in such a short time is to be admired.
Writing at the end of 2024, in just a few months the 200th anniversary will occur, it will be interesting to see what celebrations will be taking place in the Summer of 2025. See, for example, the National Railway Museum‘s plans for 2025. [42]
G.A. Sekon offered The Railway Magazine’s congratulations to the organisers of the 1925 exhibition on their organisational achievements and on the “comprehensiveness and interest of the exhibits brought together.” [1: p101] He also notes that the opportunity was taken by the King to appoint many different leading railway officers to the Order of the British Empire these included: four CBEs (Mr. R. C. Irwin, Secretary, L.M.S.R., Mr. E. A. Bolter, Secretary, G.W.R., Mr. G. Davidson, Divisional General Manager, North Eastern Area, L.N.E.R., and Mr. G. S. Szlumper, Assistant General Manager, Southern Railway), eight OBEs and fourteen MBEs.
The ‘main event’ was the procession which was “witnessed at ease and in comfort by many hundreds of thousands in view of the accessibility of the route practically from end to end and the arrangements whereby landowners generously allowed access to fields adjoining the line.” [1: p103]
The event was opened by HRH. the Duke of York, accompanied by the Duchess of York. (The Duke of York being the future George VI who became King unexpectedly following the abdication of his brother, King Edward VIII, in December 1936.)
In his opening address Mr. W. Whitelaw made it clear that, “The Exhibition was the result of the co-operation of five great railway companies, assisted by many friends from all parts of the country, who possessed interesting relics of the first passenger railway in the kingdom. It seemed very fitting that the commencement of the celebration of what took place on 27th September 1825, should be in that great railway town of Darlington. If Darlington did not own all the credit for the science of railways, at any rate no one could deny or challenge the statement that Darlington was the home of the first great railway statesman, Edward Pease.”
The Procession
A short (20 minute) film of the procession/cavalcade can be viewed here. [35]
“The centenary celebrations were held in July to allow guests from foreign countries visiting the International Railway Congress to take part. An exhibition of rolling stock at the new Faverdale Wagon Works in Darlington was opened by the Duke and Duchess of York (later King George VI and the Queen Mother). The following day the royal couple watched as procession of locomotives passed between Stockton and Oak Tree Junction, starting with a Hetton Colliery locomotive that had been built in 1822 and finishing with a replica train of ten chaldron waggons and ‘the company’s coach’ hauled by Locomotive No.1 propelled by a petrol engine in a specially built tender.” [45] A copy of the original programme for the procession can be found here. [46]
The procession was due to have 54 items, one of which had to be withdrawn (the North British Locomotive Company’s geared turbine condensing locomotive). [1: p123] The final list was: [8]
1. Hetton Colliery locomotive – 1822.
2. S. & D.R. “Derwent” – 1845.
3. NBR 0-6-0 No. 381 (LNER J31 10114) – 1867.
4. NER 0-6-0 No. 1275 – 1874.
5. LNER J26 0-6-0 No. 517 (ex NER) – 1905.
6. LNER B16 4-6-0 No. 934 (ex NER) – 1921.
7. LNER K3 2-6-0 No. 203 – 1925.
8. LNWR 0-8-0 No. 1881 (LMS 8900) – 1901.
9. LMS 0-8-0 No. 9446 (ex LNWR) – 1922.
10. LNER 02 2-8-0 No. 3501 – 1924.
11. GWR 2-8-0 No. 4700 – 1919
12. LNER P1 2-8-2 No. 2393 – 1925.
13. LNER electric loco No. 9 (hauled by J71 0-6-0T 317) (ex NER) – 1914.
14. GWR 2-2-2 “North Star”(replica), (on wagon, hauled by J71 0-6-0T No. 181) – 1837.
Of these items, The Railway Magazine chose to highlight a number of these including:
1. The Hetton Colliery Locomotive
“The procession was headed by the old Hetton Colliery engine, built in 1822 by George Stephenson and Nicholas Wood, previous to the establishment of Stephenson’s works at Newcastle-on-Tyne. The engine, by the way, was rebuilt in 1857, and again in 1882, when the link motion, at present fitted, was added.” [1: p109]
“Next in order came the old ‘Derwent’, a mineral engine of Timothy Hackworth’s design, which was built in 1845 by William and Alf Kitching, of the Hopetown Foundry, Darlington, for the Stockton and Darlington Railway. The ‘Derwent’ also ran under its own steam.” [1: p109]
“Then followed a number of engines more or less familiar to the present generation [1925], although two of them were built over 50 years ago. A 1925 modern goods express 2-6-0, with special valve gear, and a mineral engine 2-8-0 with three cylinders, were a great contrast to the veterans that had passed earlier. Then followed a “Mikado” type of locomotive built at the Doncaster works of the L.N.E.R., for fast mineral work, but even greater interest was shown in a model of the old North Star, built in 1837 by Robert Stephenson and Co., which was mounted on a Great Western ‘crocodile’, drawn by a locomotive. Several specimens of the single-driver expresses popular in the latter half of the [19th century] were in the procession, including the Cornwall, which has a driving wheel of 8 ft. 6 in. in diameter the largest locomotive driving wheel still in service in the world.” [1: p109]
4.0-6-0 Stockton & Darlington Goods
Fourth in the procession was a typical 0-6-0 locomotive from the Stockton and Darlington (S&D) Railway. This was probably NER No. 1275 which was the only NER 1001 Class locomotive to survive into LNER ownership. It was built by Dübs & Co., Glasgow, and was delivered to the S&D in May 1874. 1275 entered into LNER ownership with an official mileage of 908,984 miles. Still in its NER livery, it was quickly withdrawn on 16th February 1923. [6]
This locomotive is preserved as part of the National Collection and is on static display at the National Railway Museum at York. [6]
NER No. 1275 is preserved in the National Railway Museum in York: Science Museum Group. NER 0-6-0 ‘1001’ class steam locomotive and tender, No 1275, 1874. 1975-7009 Science Museum Group Collection Online. [7]
The LNWR Class B was a class of 0-8-0 steam locomotives introduced in 1901. These locomotives were a development of the three-cylinder compound Class A (though this letter classification was not introduced until 1911), they had a 4-cylinder compound arrangement. 170 were built between 1901 and 1904. [9]
“The London and North Eastern Railway Class P1 Mineral 2-8-2 Mikado was a class of two steam locomotives designed by Nigel Gresley. They were two of the most powerful freight locomotives ever designed for a British railway. It was initially intended they be a more powerful 2-10-0 version of the earlier Class O2 2-8-0s. The design was submitted in August 1923, for use between Peterborough and London, and also between Immingham and Wath marshalling yard. The power was quoted as being 25% more than the O2.” [21]
“No. 2393 was completed in June 1925, just in time for the Stockton & Darlington Centenary celebrations in July. It was fitted with a Robinson superheater, whilst No. 2394 (completed in November) had the “E Double” superheater recommended by The Superheater Co.” [22]
14. GWR 2-2-2 ‘North Star’ (replica)
North Star was the first GWR locomotive, it on 31st May 1838 it worked the inaugural train for the company’s directors. More details can be found on the Preserved British Steam Locomotives website. [10]
Built in 1847, ‘Cornwall’ is a preserved steam locomotive. She was built as a 4-2-2 at Crewe Works in 1847, but was extensively rebuilt and converted into her current form in 1858. [12]
Wikipedia tells us that, “In 1858, Ramsbottom redesigned Cornwall almost completely. Little survived unchanged, other than the outside frames and the centres of the drivers. The boiler was … moved entirely above the driving axle, without any notches, channels or tubes. … New cylinders and valve gear were provided. … The wheel arrangement was [changed to] 2-2-2. … Ramsbottom also included his newly designed tamper-proof safety valves.” [12]
There was another minor rebuild in the 1870s providing a typical LNWR style of cab, with a short roof and semi-open sides. It was renumbered 3020 in June 1886. [12]
The Great Northern Railway (GNR) No. 1 Class Stirling Single was a class of steam locomotive designed for express passenger work. Designed by Patrick Stirling, they were characterised by a single pair of large (8 ft 1 in) driving wheels which led to the nickname ‘eight-footer’. Originally the locomotive was designed to haul up to 26 passenger carriages at an average speed of 47 miles per hour (76 km/h). It could reach speeds of up to 85 mph (137 km/h). [14]
“The first of the class, No. 1 is the only engine to be preserved. It is exhibited at the National Railway Museum, York. It was restored to running order during the 1930s for the fiftieth anniversary of the Race to the North and steamed again during the 1980s.” [14]
The three locomotives shown in the image above are:
19. 1875 built NER Class 901 2-4-0 No. 910;
20. 1885 built LNER E5 2-4-0 No. 1463 (ex NER);
21. 1892 built LNER D17/1 4-4-0 No. 1620 (ex NER)
The LNER Encyclopedia says that “Fletcher’s ‘901’ class was his final express passenger design for the … NER. The ‘901’ Class was created in 1872 to provide new more powerful express locomotives to replace the 16in cylinder locomotives still being used by the NER for express work. The first two locomotives, Nos. 901/2, were built at Gateshead in 1872. Whilst these were being built, two batches of ten each were ordered from Beyer, Peacock & Co and Neilson & Co. These twenty engines were built and delivered in 1873. A further 33 were built at Gateshead between 1873 and 1882 in four batches.” [17]
The LNER Encyclopedia says that the “new E5 locomotives were direct descendents of Fletcher’s ‘901’s. The cab design was changed, and a completely new tender design was used. A total of twenty E5s were built in 1885, with Darlington and Gateshead building ten each.” [18]
E5 No. 1463 is owned by the National Collection, but is on loan to the Darlington ‘Head of Steam’ Museum, now known as ‘Hopetown Darlington’s. [18]
The LNER Encyclopedia also notes that the NER Class M1 (later Class M) locomotives were Wilson Worsdell’s first express passenger locomotives for the North Eastern Railway (NER). … Twenty Class M1 locomotives were built at Gateshead between 1892 and 1894. More information can be found on the LNER Encyclopedia website. [19] These NER M1 locomotives became the LNER D17/1 Class at the grouping. [20]
The LNER operated a surprising variety of electric locomotives and multiple units. Although its electric operations were eclipsed by the Southern, the LNER had the largest electric locomotive stud of the Big Four companies. More about the various electric locks and multiple units can be found on the LNER Encyclopedia website. [27]
“Sir Vincent Raven was a great believer in the electrification of main lines. After the success of the Shildon-Newport electrification, he planned to electrify the North Eastern Railway’s (NER) stretch of the East Coast main line from York to Newcastle. As a part of this plan, authorisation was granted in March 1920 to build the prototype electric passenger locomotive No. 13. This had a 2-Co-2 (4-6-4) wheel arrangement, and was built at Darlington with electrical equipment provided by Metropolitan-Vickers.” [28] The loco was completed in 1922 just before the NER became part of the LNER in 1923.
The Lancashire and Yorkshire Railway (L&YR) Hughes 4-6-4T class of steam locomotives were a 4-6-4T version of the L&YR Class 8 (‘Dreadnought’ Class 4-6-0), hence they were known as ‘Dreadnought tanks’. All were actually built by the LMS in 1924 after the grouping, albeit at the L&YR’s Horwich Works. Withdrawals started in 1938, with three engines (11112, 11115, 11116), one each in 1939 and 1940 (11113 and 11111 respectively), four in 1941 (11114, 11117–11119) and the last (11110) in January 1942. No examples were preserved. [23]
Another example of the same class, No. 11114. [23]
41. GWR 2-8-0T Locomotive No. 5225
The 4200 class of 2-8-0T engines was designed to work the heavy short-haul coal and mineral trains in South Wales. They were designed using standard GWR parts as used in the 2800 class. A total of 205 locomotives were built (including the 5205 class) between 1910 and 1940. They were the only 2-8-0T to run in Britain. [24]
“The first engine to be built was 4201 in 1910 (4200 was a later engine built in 1923). Between 1910 and 1930 195 were built numbered 4200-4299 and 5200-5294. 5205 onwards had larger cylinders and other minor alterations and were known as the 5205 class.” [24]
“Five examples of the 4200 class and three members of the 5205 class have been preserved (4247, 4248, 4253, 4270, 4277, 5224, 5229 and 5239). There are also three locomotives preserved from the 7200 class which were rebuilds of the 5205 series 5264 rebuilt as 7229, 5275 rebuilt as 7202 and 5277 rebuilt as 7200).” [24]
42. LNER ‘Garratt’ Locomotive No. 2395
“The London and North Eastern Railway Class U1 was a solitary 2-8-0+0-8-2 Garratt locomotive designed for banking coal trains over the Worsborough Bank,[i] a steeply graded line in South Yorkshire and part of the Woodhead Route. It was both the longest and the most powerful steam locomotive ever to run in Britain. It was built in 1925 with the motion at each end being based on an existing 2-8-0 design. The original number was 2395, and it was renumbered 9999 in March 1946, and then 69999 after nationalisation in 1948, although it retained its cab-side plate bearing its original number throughout its life. The locomotive ran for some time as an oil burner, and was tried out on the Lickey Incline in 1949–1950 and again, after the electrification of its home line, in 1955. These trials were unsuccessful, and so the locomotive was withdrawn in 1955 and scrapped.” [26]
The locomotive was constructed in just 3 weeks in 1925, perhaps with the Stockton & Darlington centenary celebrations in mind. It was ready just in time and sent in the standard outshopped grey livery before being painted black. [26]
43. LNER Petrol Railcar/Railmotor No. 130Y, later 2105Y
The 1920s were quite an era for experimentation on the railways of the UK. This Railcar/Railmotor is included in a number looked at elsewhere on this blog. The relevant article can be found here. [30]
The North Eastern Railway (NER) “authorised the construction of the experimental Petrol Autocar No. 2105 on 21st September 1922. On 19th October, Raven reported the purchase of a 6-cylinder 105hp Daimler engine from the Slough Trading Estate Co. Ltd. The remainder of the vehicle was built at York Carriage Works and was completed in July 1923. By this time, Grouping had occurred, and the autocar was given the LNER number 2105Y. It was later renumbered as No. 22105 in August 1926.” [31]
Sentinel produced a significant number of steam railcars/railmotors. They are covered elsewhere on this blog. Please click here. [33]
The LNER arranged for trials of two Sentinel railmotors in 1924. After those trials, adaptations were made including providing larger boilers. The result was ideal for LNER uses and a series of 80 units were purchased. The first two large boiler railcars were ordered on 11th December 1924. These railcars used the bodies from the trial railcars and the cost was discounted accordingly. Numbered Nos. 12E & 13E, the railcars entered service with the LNER in May 1925 and were classified as Diagram 14600-614E. [34] They were ‘state of art’ units available just in time for the Stockton & Darlington celebrations.
46. LNER 0-8-0 Q7 (formerly NER T3) with mineral wagons.
The North Eastern Railway Class T3, classified as Class Q7 by the LNER, was a class of 0-8-0 steam locomotive designed for heavy freight. Five were built by the NER in 1919 and a further 10 by the LNER in 1924. No. 904 was put in charge of a rake of mineral wagons for the procession. [32]
This train consisted of a series of tableaux depicting the history of the wheel. It was described in the publication ‘Railway Wonders of the World’ like this: “The tableaux consisted of six wagons each carrying a separate ‘picture’. The first was allegorical and depicted a number of astrologers grouped at one side of a symbolic wheel, with a scene showing modern engineering practice on the other. The two scenes were joined through the spokes of the wheel by a huge chain, representing the links of time. The second tableau showed a tribe of prehistoric men, who, having felled a tree with their flint axes, were shown transporting the trunk on logs used as rollers – the earliest form of the wheel. Then came an Egyptian scene in which one of the royal Pharaohs was being drawn on a wheeled platform by slaves, showing how the Egyptians started the wheel in its manifold forms so that, through the ages that followed, progress successively moved on the wheels of chariot, wain, and coach. This was followed by the fourth tableaux showing how the wheel was discarded for a time when Sedan chairs were used, and the fifth depicting the story of the wheel in transport opening its most famous chapter when Stephenson mounted an engine on wheels and steam locomotion began. On one side of this wagon Stephenson was explaining the working of a model of “Locomotion No. 1” to a group of friends and workmen, whilst on the other side modem mechanics were working with present-day materials and tools. The final tableau showed how the railways of the world have grown from the few miles of permanent way uniting Stockton and Darlington.” [37]
48. GNSR 4-4-0 No. 45A and train of old 4-wheel coaches
The locomotive was one of a Class which transferred to the LNER. More details can be found here. [38]
No. 45A was repainted in GNSR green to take part in the Stockton & Darlington Centenary celebrations. It was withdrawn on 31st July 1925 shortly after its return. There was some talk of preservation, and it was temporarily employed as a shunter at the Inverurie Works. However, preservation was not to be, and No. 45A was scrapped soon afterwards. [38]
LMS 4-6-0 No. 10474 was a Class 8 4-6-0 steam locomotive to a Lancashire & Yorkshire Railway design that was built for the LMS by Horwich Works in 1925. 10474 and its siblings were used on express passenger trains for the LMS. [36]
Its train is made up of nine vestibule carriages built at Derby and used on the West Coast route to Scotland. [1: p124]
No. 4082 ‘Windsor Castle’, “was chosen as the Royal engine from the time that it was driven from Swindon works to Swindon station by King George V accompanied by Queen Mary on 28th April 1924. Plaques were mounted on the side of the cab to commemorate the occasion.” [39]
No 111 ‘Viscount Churchill’ (converted into a Castle class 4-6-0 from ‘The Great Bear’) took charge of a train of express passenger articulated coaches. Didcot Railway Centre says that the new GWR articulated coaches “came as a surprise to many as the railway press was unaware they had been developed. The train had one two-coach unit and two three-coach units. The formation was one brake first, one first, one first restaurant car, one kitchen car, one third restaurant car, two third-class coaches and a brake third. The first-class coach interiors were finished in walnut and the third-class in mahogany.” [40]
The LSWR N15 class was a British 2–cylinder 4-6-0 express passenger steam locomotive designed by Robert Urie. The class had “a complex build history spanning three sub-classes and ten years of construction from 1918 to 1927. The first batch of the class was constructed for the London and South Western Railway (LSWR), where they hauled heavy express passenger trains to the south coast ports and further west to Exeter. After the Lord Nelsons, they were the second biggest 4-6-0 passenger locomotives on the Southern Railway. They could reach speeds of up to 90 mph (145 km/h).” [41] The Southern Railway (SR) publicity department gave the N15 locomotives names associated with Arthurian legend; the class hence becoming known as King Arthurs.
53. LNER Train of Articulated Stock behind LNER A2 4-6-2 No. 2400 ‘City of Newcastle’
The LNER Class A2 4-6-2 steam locomotive was designed by Vincent Raven for the North Eastern Railway (as NER class 4.6.2). Two were built by the NER in 1922 before the grouping and another three by the LNER in 1924. Their LNER numbers were 2400–2404. All five locomotives were named by the LNER. ‘City of Newcastle’ was the first of the class. [43]
The replica train pulled by a modern incarnation of ‘Locomotion No.1’ was the last element of the procession/cavalcade. It was somewhat shorter than the original train of September 1825. ..
On 27th September 1825, Locomotion No. 1 hauled the first train on the Stockton and Darlington Railway, driven by George Stephenson. The train consisted of Locomotion No.1, eleven wagons of coal, the carriage ‘Experiment’, and a further 20 wagons of passengers, guests, and workmen. Around 300 tickets had been sold, but about twice as many people were believed to have been aboard. The train, which had an estimated weight of 80 metric tons and was 400 feet long, reached a maximum speed of 12 mph, and took two hours to complete the first 8.7 miles of the journey to Darlington, slowed by a derailed wagon and a blocked feed pump valve for an average speed of 8 mph. [44]
“Locomotion No. 1 (originally named Active) … was built in 1825 by … George and Robert Stephenson at their manufacturing firm, Robert Stephenson and Company. It became the first steam locomotive to haul a passenger-carrying train on a public railway … [It] was ordered by the Stockton and Darlington Railway Company in September 1824; its design benefitted from George Stephenson’s experience building his series of Killingworth locomotives. It is believed that Locomotion No. 1 was the first locomotive to make use of coupling rods to link together its driving wheels, reducing the chance of the wheels slipping on the iron rails. However, the centre-flue boiler proved to be a weakness, providing a poorer heating surface than later multi-flue boilers. … Locomotion hauled the first train on the Stockton and Darlington Railway, the first locomotive to run on a public railway. On 1st July 1828, it was heavily damaged when its boiler exploded at Aycliffe Lane station, killing its driver, John Cree. It was rebuilt, but as a consequence of the rapid advances in locomotive design, [it] became obsolete within a decade. It was used on the railway until 1850, after which it was converted into a stationary engine. In 1857, as a consequence of its historical importance, Locomotion was preserved and put on display. Between 1892 and 1975, it was on static display at one of the platforms at Darlington Bank Top railway station, and was then on display at the Head of Steam museum based at Darlington North Road railway station between 1975 and 2021. It was then moved to the Locomotion museum in Shildon. A working replica of Locomotion was built, and following years of operation at Beamish Museum was put on display at the Head of Steam museum.” [44]
The Exhibition
At the Railway Centenary Exhibition held in the LΝΕR’s Faverdale Wagon Works and Sidings at Darlington “was gathered together the biggest and most interesting collection of railway appliances, locomotives, rolling stock and other material ever exhibited in this country. The locomotives and rolling stock on rails at the exhibition sidings numbered 99, whilst in the building were three locomotives and about 650 other items. … The railways were naturally the chief exhibitors, but many extremely interesting items were loaned from private collections.” [1: p127]
The Railway Magazine went on to list all the major exhibits, some of which were in the cavalcade/procession covered above.
The details given in The Railway Magazine are reproduced in the Appendix below.
The exhibition was comprehensive, giving an outstanding insight into the world of railways in Great Britain.
Appendix – Exhibition Items
The Railway Magazine … [1: p127-130]
In the outdoor catalogue were: the model of North Star, constructed for the exhibition, utilising the original driving wheels. Nearby was the Invicta, Canterbury and Whitstable Railway, built by R. Stephenson & Co., in 1830, and a 2-2-2 engine constructed by Bury, Curtis & Kennedy in 1846 for the Great Southern Railway. Two locomotives came from Belgium, one a 2-2-2 saddle tank, with tender built for the 3-ft. 7-in. gauge Anvers-Gand Railway in 1844, the other a full-size model of a 2-2-2 engine built in 1835 for the Belgian State Railways. Other old locomotives included the Derwent, Cornwall and the Hetton Colliery locomotive, which led the van in the Centenary procession. There was also the historic Locomotion, and a full size model of the Rocket. The remaining locomotives are tabulated according to groups, subdivided on the basis of original ownership.
Of these, the sections of the LNER were responsible for 33 locomotives.
The NER‘s total was 14:
No. 949 0-4-4 5-ft. passenger tank built by Neilson & Co. in 1874, designed by E. Fletcher;
No. 1334, 0-4-4 5-ft. 11-in. passenger tank built at Darlington in 1901, designed by Wilson Worsdell;
No. 2151, 4-4-4 5-ft. 9-in. passenger tank, 3 cylinders, built at Darlington in 1913, designed by Sir Vincent Raven;
No. 1275, 0-6-0 5-ft. mineral engine, built in 1874 by Dubs & Co., designed by W. Bouch;
No. 517, 0-6-0 4-ft. 74-in. mineral engine built at Gateshead in 1905, designed by W. Worsdell;
No. 934, 4-6-0 5-ft. 8-in. express goods engine, 3 cylinders, built at Gateshead in 1921, designed by Sir Vincent Raven;
No. 902, 0-8-0, 4-ft. 71-in. 3-cylinder mineral engine, built at Darlington in 1919, designed by Sir Vincent Raven;
No. 910, 2-4-0, 7-ft. express passenger engine, built at Gateshead in 1875, designed by E. Fletcher;
No. 1463, 2-4-0 7-ft. express passenger engine, built at Darlington in 1885, “Tennant” type;
No. 1620 4-4-0 7-ft. 1.25-in. express passenger engine, built at Gateshead, 1892, by W. Worsdell;
No. 2207, 4-4-2, 6-ft. 10-in. express passenger engine, 3 cylinders, built at Darlington, 1911, designed by Sir Vincent Raven;
No. 2006, 4-6-0 6-ft. 11-in. express passenger engine, built at Gateshead, 1900, designed by W. Worsdell, Gold Medal, Paris, 1900;
No. 9, 0-4-4-0 4-ft. electric freight engine, built at Darlington, 1914, designed by Sir Vincent Raven;
No. 13, 4-6-4, 6-ft. 8-in. electric express engine, built at Darlington, 1922, designed by Sir Vincent Raven.
The Great Central section was represented by four engines:
No. 6499, 0-6-0, 3-ft. 9-in, saddle tank shunting engine, built by Manning Wardle & Co., 1876, for the Manchester, Sheffield and Lincolnshire Railway;
No. 5088, 4-6-2 5-ft. 7-in. passenger side tank engine, built at Gorton, 1923, designed by J. G. Robinson;
No. 5972, 4-2-2 7-ft. 9-in. inside cylinder express passenger engine, built at Gorton, 1900, designed by H. Pollitt;
No. 6169, Lord Faringdon, 4-6-0 6-ft. 9-in. 4-cylinder express passenger engine, built at Gorton, designed by J. G. Robinson.
Two locomotives represented the GE section
No. 7133 was a 0-4-0 3-ft. 1-in. enclosed tramway engine built at Stratford in 1897;
No. 8900 (1900), Claud Hamilton, 4-4-0 7-ft. express passenger engine, built at Stratford, 1900, designed by J. Holden. Gold Medal Paris Exhibi- tion, 1900.
The GN section showed three engines:
The celebrated No. 1, 4-2-2 8-ft. 2-in. express engine, with outside cylinders, built at Doncaster, 1872, designed by P. Stirling:
No. 3990 (No. 990), 4-4-2 6-ft. 8-in. express engine, built at Doncaster, 1898, designed by H. A. Ivatt, the first “Atlantic” engine constructed in Great Britain;
No. 3251 (No. 251), 4-4-2 6-ft. 8-in. express engine, built at Doncaster, 1902, designed by H. A. Ivatt, the first engine on a British railway with a wide firebox.
The NBR section was represented by two engines:
No. 10114, 0-6-0 5-ft. 13-in. goods engine, built by Neilson & Co. in 1868, designed by T. Wheatley;
No. 9902, Highland Chief, 4-4-2 6-ft. 9-in, express engine, built by R. Stephenson & Co., 1911, designed by W. P. Reid.
The GNSR section was represented by No. 45A, 4-4-0 5-ft. 61-in. mixed traffic engine, built in 1866 by Neilson & Co., designed by W. Cowan.
The remaining seven locomotives exhibited by the LNER. were built since the grouping of the railways:
“Garratt” type 2-8-0+0-8-2, built by Beyer Peacock & Co., 1825, fitted with H. N. Gresley’s valve gear, driving wheels, 4-ft. 8-in. diameter, 6 cylinders (three to each truck), the first 6-cylinder “Garratt” locomotive, weight in working order, 176tons;
No. 203, 2-6-0 3-cylinder 5-ft. 8-in. express goods engine, built an Darlington, 1925, designed by H. N. Gresley (No. 202, a similar engine, was shown in the Exhibition building);
No 3499, 2-8-0 3-cylinder 4-ft. 8-in. mineral engine, built at Doncaster, 1924, designed by H. N. Gresley;
No. 2393, “Mikado” type (2-8-2) 3-cylinder 5-ft. 2-in. mineral engine, fitted with “booster” to drive trailing wheels, built at Doncaster, 1925, designed by H. N. Gresley;
No. 2563, William Whitelaw, 4-6-2 3-cylinder 6-ft. 8-in. express engine, designed by H. N. Gresley;
No. 2400, City of Newcastle, 4-6-2 3-cylinder 6-ft. 8-in. express engine, built at Darlington, 1922, designed by Sir Vincent Raven.
The LMS exhibit of modern locomotives comprised six engines: …
Three LNWR engines: …
No. 1881, 4-cylinder compound 4-ft. 3-in. mineral engine, built at Crewe, 1901, designed by F. W. Webb;
No. 9446, 0-8-0 4-ft. 2-in. goods engine, built at Crewe, 1922, designed by C. J. B. Cooke;
No. 5900, Sir Gilbert Claughton, 4-cylinder, 6-ft. 3-in. express engine, built at Crewe, 1913, designed by C. J. B. Cooke.
The Midland section exhibit was No. 679, 4-2-2 7-ft. 91-in. express engine, built at Derby, 1899, designed by S. W. Johnson.
The L&YR section showed No. 10474, 4-6-0 4-cylinder 6-ft. 3-in. express, built at Horwich, designed by G. Hughes.
The LMS specimen was No. 11112, 4-cylinder 6-ft. 3-in. passenger tank, built at Horwich, 1924, designed by G. Hughes.
The Somerset & Dorset Joint Railway No. 86 2-8-0 4-ft. 71-in. mineral engine, built by R. Stephenson & Co., 1825, designed by Sir H. Fowler (LMS)
The GWR was represented by three modern locomotives:
No. 5225, 2-8-0 4-ft. 7-in. mineral tank engine, built at Swindon, designed by G. J. Churchward;
No. 4700, 2-8-0 5-ft. 8-in. express goods engine, built at Swindon in 1919, designed by G. J. Churchward;
No. 4082, Windsor Castle, 4-6-0 4-cylinder 6-ft. 8-in. express, built at Swindon, designed by C. B. Collett. This is the locomotive the King and Queen drove at Swindon.
The SR was represented by No 449, Sir Torre, at the head of the train of modern coaches.
In addition there were: the City and South London Railway‘s old electric engine supplied for the opening of the railway in 1890. The LNER showed a petrol bus for rail service, a petrol autocar, and a Sentinel-Cammell steam coach.
Modern rolling-stock-passenger and freight was represented in profusion: …
A complete train by each of the four groups: …
GWR – showed an articulated rake of coaches and a 10-compartment third-class corridor coach, 70ft long;
LNER – showed a similar articulated rake and an electric coach, a Post Office van, a sleeper with first-class berths and third-class compartments, a twin (articulated) sleeper, a ‘triplet’ dining set, corridor third etc.;
SR – sent Pullman Car ‘Lydia’, whilst the Pullman Car Company exhibited ‘Niobe’;
London Electric Railways by one of the latest tube coaches.
Also in view were:
The “Dandy” coach from the Port Carlisle Railway;
A Stockton & Darlington carriage built circa 1850;
A GNSR coach from circa 1865.
The wide range of modern freight vehicles was well shown by the 18 wagons, etc, of different types exhibited by the LNER, varying from a four-wheeled horse-box to a set of three 60-ton flat wagons tight coupled for conveying 160-ton guns. The GWR showed a 20-ton mineral wagon, a 35-ton well trolley, a 30-ton articulated gun wagon, and a 70-ft. rail or timber truck. There were a few items of old goods rolling-stock, including a ‘Chaldron’ coal wagon built in 1826.
Within the building the fine display of signalling appliances from the earliest days, through the crude interlocking of some sixty years ago to the present perfect locking apparatus, electrical and mechanical, attracted much attention. So did the many specimens representing all periods during the past 100 years of the rails, chairs, and sleepers that go to make up the permanent way. Chief interest was taken in the numerous models, many on a large scale, and as regards locomotives chiefly working models, actuated by compressed air. Of the 46 locomotive models there were two of the Locomotion, while several GWR. broad-gauge engines made a fine display. The Metropolitan Railway was a big exhibitor in this section, showing seven or eight models of locomotives of various railways. A quarter-size model of the GNR’s 8-ft. 1-in. single (Stirling’s famous 4-2-2 type) was prominent, as, too, was the Dandy Cart, with horse aboard, as attached to the rear of horse-hauled mineral trains. Here also were models in plenty of railway bridges and viaducts, railway coaches, steamers, &c. Early railway tickets, bills, time-tables, passes, medals, &c., were to be seen in profusion, with specimens of Edmondson’s ticket-dating presses and ticket-printing machines invented in 1840, and taken from actual work to be shown at Faverdale. Railway-station bells, besides early signal and hand lamps of various types, were represented, whilst the many loan collections of literature and maps relative to early railways provided information of rare value to those interested in the development of the railway system.
References
G.A. Sekon, ed.; 1825-1925: The Railway Centenary Celebrations at Darlington, 1st to 3rd July 1925; in The Railway Magazine, London, No. 338, August 1925, p101-142.
In July 1923, The Railway Magazine carried an article about the Callander & Oban Railway (C&O) written by G.F. Gairns. [1]
Gairns commented that the C&O constituted the third of the three great mountain lines: the Perth-Inverness line of the Highland Railway; the West Highland Line of the North British Railway; and the Callander & Oban Railway (including the Ballachulish Extension).
The Callander & Oban Railway. [1: p11]
A short series of four articles about the Ballachulish line can be found here, [2] here, [3] here, [4] and here. [5]
The C&O had previously been written about in the Railway Magazine, specifically in the issues of September 1903, August 1904, and August and September 1912. Gairns leaves the detailed history to those previous articles, apart from a brief introduction, and focusses in 1923 on a journey along the line from Stirling to Oban and to Ballachulish.
An excellent presentation of the various scenes which preceded the Callander & Oban Railway can be found in the early pages of John Thomas’, ‘The Callander & Oban Railway‘. [62: p1-26]
Ultimately, an agreement was signed between the Scottish Central Railway (SCR) and the Callander & Oban (C&O) was signed on 17th December 1864 which affirmed that the SCR would subscribe £200,000 to the scheme. “The C&O was to have nine directors, five appointed by the Scottish Central and four by the promoters. The line was to be ‘made, constructed and completed in a good, substantial sufficient and workmanlike manner, and without the adoption of timber bridges and culverts’. … The rails were to weigh 75 lb per yard and were to be laid in 24 ft lengths on larch sleepers placed at an average distance of 3 ft.” [62: p26-27]
As part of the agreement, once at least 20 miles of line directly connected to the Dunblane, Doune & Callander Railway had been constructed and passed by the Board of Trade, the Scottish Central Railway undertook work it in perpetuity, on the basis that it would receive half of the gross revenue.
The Callander & Oban Railway bill was drawn up and presented in Parliament in January 1865. … The bill sought:
“First, a Railway commencing about Five Furlongs South-westwards from the Schoolhouse in the Town of Oban called the Oban Industrial School, and terminating by a Junction with the Dunblane, Doune and Callander Railway, about One and a Half Furlongs Eastward from the Booking Office of the Callander Station of the Railway.
Secondly, a Tramway commencing by a Junction with the Railway above described about One Furlong South-westwards from the said Schoolhouse, and terminating on the Pier on the East Side of the Harbour of Oban about Two Chains Eastward from the South-western end of the said Pier.” [62: p27]
148 railway bills were passed in a two-day session of Parliament on January 1865. These included the C&O and the Dingwall & Skye Railway. Both these schemes had a similar primary purpose – to reach ports on the West Coast of Scotland to give the fishing trade access to markets in the rest of Scotland and further South.
Thomas comments: “The Callander & Oban Railway Act was passed on 8th July 1865. The first sod was not cut for over fourteen months. Five years were to pass before a revenue-earning wheel was to turn on the line (and on only 17½ miles at that), and it would be fifteen years before a train entered Oban. … But even before the Act was passed sweeping changes had transformed the railway political scene. Ten days earlier, on 29th June, the Scottish Central had won permission to take over the Dunblane, Doune & Callander as from 31st July 1865; and the Central had enjoyed its new-found gains for one day. On 1st August 1865 the Central itself had been absorbed by the Caledonian, which acquired all its assets and liabilities including the obligation to finance and operate the Callander & Oban. At the outset the C & O directors found themselves with formidable new masters.” [62: p28]
As much as the Callander & Oban had looked attractive to the Scottish Central. “It was not at all attractive to the Caledonian, whose shareholders, had no stomach for squandering cash among the Perthshire hills. … The 1861 census had shown that Oban and Callander between them possessed fewer than 3,000 inhabitants, and the scattered hamlets between the two could produce barely a thousand more. The certain dividends lying in the coal and iron traffic of the Clyde Valley were infinitely preferable to the nebulous rewards from the fish and sheep of the West Highlands.” [62: p29]
From the beginning there was a faction on that Caledonian board which wished to drop expansion towards Oban at the earliest opportunity, “but the terms of the SCR-Caledonian amalgamation agreement forbade such a course. And there was another reason, if a negative one, why the Caledonian should use caution. The amalgamations of 1865 had given the Edinburgh & Glasgow to the North British, which as the result had now penetrated deep into traditional Caledonian territory – Glasgow and the Clyde coast; and the North British already possessed and exercised running powers into Callander. If the Caledonian abandoned its awkward foster-child on the Callander doorstep, it was reasonable to suppose that the North British would attempt to pick it up.” [62: p29]
The Callander & Oban directors had undertaken to find £400,000 along the route of the railway. This proved to be a monumental task. Their first attempts brought in 201 individual shareholders who subscribed for a total of £56,360 worth of shares! The C&O may well have been stillborn had it not been for the appointment of John Anderson as the Secretary to the C&O.
Given palpable hostility between the directors, Anderson “was left to conduct the line’s affairs single-handed.” [62: p32] Thomas goes on to describe in some detail the different methods he used to achieve progress. The machinations involved need not, however, detain us here
Gairns writes:
“The Callander and Oban Railway Company was constituted in 1865. The Dunblane, Doune and Callander Railway was already in existence, having been opened in 1858. The Callander and Oban line was opened: Callander to Killin Junction, 1870; Killin Junction to Tyndrum, August, 1873; thence to Dalmally, May, 1877; and to Oban, July, 1880. At Balquhidder, at first known as Lochearnhead, the line from Crieff makes connection. This route, with connecting lines, was opened, Perth to Methven, 1838; Methven Junction to Crieff, 1866; Gleneagles (previously Crieff Junction, 1856; Crieff to Comrie, 1893; Comrie to St. Fillans, 1901; St. Fillans to Balquhidder (Lochearnhead), 1905. The Callander and Oban line has always been worked by the Caledonian Company, and is now [1923] included in the London Midland and Scottish Railway.
Dunblane is the ordinary junction for theCallander and Oban line, but trains which are not through to or from Glasgow use Stirling as their southern terminus. In some instances, ordinary Caledonian main line engines work the trains to and from Callander, the special C. and O, engines being attached or detached there, though this is mainly a traffic arrangement, convenient in the case of certain trains. At Dunblane there is an island platform on the down side, thus enabling branch trains to wait on the outer side to make connections. To Doune is double track, and the country mainly pastoral. Thence to Callander is single line, controlled by electric train tablet, as is the whole of the Callander and Oban line. The scenery continues to be of lowland character, though picturesque, but signs of the mountain country beyond show themselves. Between Doune and Callander is an intermediate crossing place – Drumvaich Crossing – to break up the long section of nearly 7 miles between stations. The original line diverged into what is now the goods station at Callander, the present station having been built when the Oban line was made. Callander station is distinctly picturesque, an ornamental clock tower surmounting the footbridge, and the station buildings being neat and attractive, while the platforms are decorated florally. It also has refreshment rooms on the platforms. On the up and down sides there are short bay lines from which locals can start as required. For down trains there is also a ticket platform, half a mile or so short of the station, but this is now used only by a few trains.” [1: p10]
Wikipedia tells us that “closure [for Callander Station] came on 1st November 1965, when the service between Callander and Dunblane ended as part of the Beeching Axe. The section between Callander and Crianlarich (lower) was closed on 27th September that year following a landslide at Glen Ogle.” [8]
This is an embedded link to a Flickr image of Callander Railway Station (seen from the road bridge at the East end of the Station) in 1973, (c) David Christie. [10]A very similar view in the 21st century. [Google Streetview, October 2016]The road bridge at the East end of Callander Raiway Station in 1967 (Ancaster Road Bridge). (c) J.R. Hume, Public Domain [11]Callander Railway Station forecourt in the 1940s, seen from the East. This image was shared on the Callander Heritage Society Facebook Page on 18th December 2023, (c) Public Domain. [12]A similar view in the 21st century. [Google Streetview, October 2016]Lookin West from Callendar Railway Station after the lifting of the rails. The tall signal box allowed for visibility beyond Leny Road Bridge which is just off the scene to the left. This image was shared on the Callendar Heritage Facebook Page on 27th September 2023. [14]
The old railway passed under Leny Road, Callander at the western end of the station site. The first image below shows the alignment of the railway looking Northeast from Leny Road. The pelican crossing marks the location of the old bridge. The second image shows the public footpath which follows the old railway to the South side of Leny Road.
The location of Leny Road Bridge, Google Streetview, July 2023]The location of Leny Road Bridge, Google Streetview, July 2023]
The first length of the railway to the West of Callander is shown on the RailMapOnline.com image below.
The route of the Callander & Oban Railway to the West of Callander as shown on the satellite imagery provided by RailMapOnline.com. Loch Lubnaig is at the top-left of this image. [15]
This embedded image from the Canmore National Record of the Historic Environment looks Northeast along the Callander & Oban railway towards Callander Railway station. The Bowstring Girder Bridge in the foreground is mentioned by Gairns below. The stone-arch bridge in the distance is the bridge that carried Leny Road over the old railway, (c) J.R. Hume. [16]
Gairns mentions the Pass of Leny and the Falls of Leny, below. The falls are shown on the map extract immediately below. The Falls can be seen in the right half of the extract.
The Falls of Leny and the Callander & Oban Railway. Note that the river – Garbh Uisge – is crossed twice by the railway. These bridges were bowstring Girder bridges like that seen above. [17]
This image is embedded from Flickr and shows one of the two girder bridges shown on the map extract above. The photograph was taken shortly before the closure of the line. (c) locoman1966. [18]
Gairns continues:
“Crossing the River Leny [Garbh Uisge] by a bowstring girder bridge, mountain country is entered in the Pass of Leny, and Ben Ledi and Ben Vane on the one side (the former skirted by the line), Ben Each, and, in the distance, Ben Vorlich, on the other, give evidence of the nature of the country traversed. The Falls of Leny can be seen on the right providing the intervening foliage is not too full. St. Bride’s Crossing, at the head of the Pass of Leny, is now only used as a crossing place at periods of special pressure. For nearly two miles the line then proceeds along the western shore, and almost at the water’s edge of Loch Lubnaig ‘the crooked lake’. A short distance beyond St. Bride’s Crossing is Craignacailleach Platform, used by children of railway servants going to school in Callander the 5.40 a.m. from Oban and the 6.45 pm from Callander, daily except Saturdays. At the picturesque little station of Strathyre, both platforms are adorned by ornamental shrubs, and on the up side there is a fountain, rockeries, rustic gate ways, etc.. lending further interest to this pretty station among its beautiful natural surroundings.
Before reaching Strathyre station the River Balvag is crossed. It keeps close company with the railway until near Kingshouse Platform, where a glimpse is had of the hills encircling Loch Val. Kingshouse Platform is used as a halt, trains calling as required, for the convenience of visitors to the Braes o’ Balquhidder.” [1: p10-11]
The adjacent RailMapOnline.com satellite image shows the railway running up the West side of Loch Lubnaig. Strathyre, mentioned by Gairns above, can be seen to the North of the Loch.
This portion of the old railway has been metalled to support its use as National Cycleway No. 7. South of the Loch, there is now a car park close to the upstream of the two bridges noted above.
The old railway formation is now the National Cycle Route No. 7. The blue line marks the route of the railway. The River Garbh Uisge is to the right of this North facing photograph. [Google Streetview, March 2009]Another North facing view, this time alongside Loch Lubnaig. The tarmacked cycle route follows the line of the old railway. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
North of Loch Lubnaig, the old railway ran North through Strathyre, first crossing the river to the East bank and few hundred metres short of the Railway Station.
This extract from the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1898, published in 1901 [19] shows the small village of Strathyre, its railway station and the bridge over the River Leny [Garbh Uisge].
Looking South from the main platform at Strathyre Railway Station towards Callander in September 1956, (c) T. Morgan and made available for use here under a Creative Commons Licence (CC BY-SA 2.0). [20]Looking back through the station site from a minor road just to the North. [Google Streetview, July 2023]Looking North along the old railway from the same minor. [Google Streetview, July 2023]
North of Strathyre the line continued North-northeast towards Balquhidder.
RailMapOnline.com again – the satelitel image shows the route of the line North from Strathyre through Balquidder. [15]
King’s House Inn on the modern A84 had its own Halt – Kingshouse Platform. This was a request halt serving both King’s House Inn (just to the east of the line) and the road to Balquhidder Glen (to the west). The halt was built at the expense of the King’s House Inn. It was a single platform, on the east side of the line, with a waiting shelter. Both platform and building were built in timber. Traffic handled included passengers, children using the school train and milk churns. As can be seen below, the halt was located south of the road to the glen.
Kingshouse Platform (Halt) as shown on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1898, published in 1901. [21]Looking back along the line towards Strathyre from the road up the Glen. [Google Streetview, July 2023]Looking Northeast along the line towards Lochearnhead Railway Station from the road up the Glen. [Google Streetview, July 2023]
A short distance Northeast of Kingshouse Platform was Lochearnhead Railway Station sited some distance South of the community of the same name.
Lochearnhead Railway Station. [22]Lochearnhead Railway Station as it appears on the 25″ Ordnance Survey of 1898, published 1901. [23]The same location in the 21st century, as it appears on the ESRI satellite imagery provided by the NLS. The old railway ran from bottom-left to top-middle of this extract. [24]
The station was renamed Balquhidder Station on 1st July 1904, when the line to Crieff, Gleneagles and Perth was completed. The station then became the junction station. The branch came in from the North, paralleled by the Oban line for some distance, from the head of Loch Earn. Balquhidder station had an island platform on the up side to provide for connecting trains. A new station was built on the branch to serve Lochearnhead village. [25]
Balquhidder Railway Station looking Southwest towards Callander on 27th September 1961. The branch line was off to the left of this image, (c) Ben Brooksbank and authorised for reuse under a Creative Commons Licence (CC BY-SA 2.0). [26]
Gairns continues:
“Leaving Balquhidder the Oban line climbs steeply along the hillside as it finds its way up Glen Ogle, overlooking, in the ascent, the Crieff line as it follows the shores of Loch Earn eastward, and giving views over the waters of the Loch, amidst their mountain setting, which are said to be the finest in the British Isles. … Nearly 8 miles separate Balquhidder and Killin Junction stations, though there is an intermediate crossing – Glenoglehead. This was the site of the original Killin station, before the opening of the Killin Branch Railway. The whole length of ‘gloomy’ Glen Ogle – a wild rocky valley, four miles in length, described as the Khyber Pass of Scotland – is traversed, with its rocky boulder-strewn slopes, the railway being carried in places on brick or masonry viaducts around the face of the rock where the cutting of a ledge was well-nigh impossible. For most of the ascent the view from the train is down almost precipitous slopes, continued upwards on the other side.” [1: p11]
The Oban line runs South to North on this extract from the RailMapOnline.com satellite imagery. The branch turns away to run East along the North side of Loch Earn which just peeps into this satellite image at the bottom-right. [15]Four pictures of Glen Ogle Viaduct. The first was taken from the opposite side of the valley, (c) Euan Reid, Octobr 2024. [Google Maps, November 2024]Summer (c) Craig McArdle. (2023)Autumn (c) Sky T. (2021)Winter (c) Ken Schwart (2022)This next extract from RailMapOnline.com’s satellite imagery shows that to the North of Glen Ogle the old railway turned to the West. The line entering the extract from the top and meeting with the Callander & Oban Railway is the Killin Branch. [15]
Gairns continues:
“At the northern end of the Pass the line curves westward, overlooking the Loch Tay branch which runs from Killin Junction to the little town of Killin, with an extension of about a mile to a pier on Loch Tay to connect with the railway steamers which serve the whole length of the Loch, glimpses of which are had from the Oban train. The branch is on a lower level and its track can be seen for a long distance from the main line. The branch railway is one of very heavy gradients. At Killin Junction it makes connection with the main line which has descended from Glenoglehead to meet it. The station here has the usual island platform on the up side, to accommodate the branch trains clear of the main line.” [1: p11-12]
Looking South towards Lochearnhead, the A85 and the route of the old railway run immediately adjacent to each other alongside Locham Lairig Cheile which is just off the right side of this photograph. [Google Streetview, May 2022]Looking North towards Glenoglehead Crossing at the smae location as the image above. Lochan Lairig Cheile ican be picked out on the left of the image. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
Glenoglehead Crossing permitted two trains on the line to pass each other.
A Google Maps satellite image extract showing the location of Glenoglehead Crossing in the 21st century. It was once known as Killian Railway Station (even though over 3 miles from Killin) and was at that time the northern terminus of the Callander & Oban Railway. [Google Maps, November 2024]
From Glenoglehead the line dropped down to Killin Junction. The two map extracts above come from the same 6″ Ordnance Survey sheet surveyed in 1899 and printed in 1901. [27]
The location of Glenoglehead Railway Station with the original station building in private hands. [Google Streetview, May 2022]The route of the old railway descending from Glenoglehead. [Google Streetview, May 2022]The line ran West on the Southern slopes of Glen Dochart. {Google Streetview, May 2022]An enlarged extract from the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1899 showing the location of Killin Junction. [27]A similar length of the line on the RailMapOnline.com satellite imagery. [15]Killin Junction Railway Station and Signal Box. This view looks Southwest through the station towards the Signal Box. This image is one of a number which scroll across the screen on [28]Killin Junction Railway Station. This view looks Northeast. The image is one of a number which scroll across the screen on https://railwaycottagekillin.co.uk/history [28]
Just to the Southwest of Killin Junction the line was carried over the Ardchyle Burn on a stone viaduct – Glendhu Viaduct.
Glendu Viaduct carried the old railway over the Ardchyle Burn, (c) Richard Webb and made available for resue under a Creative Commons Licence (CC BY-SA 2.0), [29]
A short distance to the West of the viaduct, a farm acess track was carried over the railway on a stone arched bridge.
Farm access bridge over the old railway. This image was shared on the Re-Appreciate the Callander & Oban Line Facebook Group by John Gray on 6th October 2018. [32]
Along the length of the old railway between Killin Junction and Luib Railway Sation two more structures are worthy of note. First, Ledcharrie Viaduct at around the half-way point between Killin Junction and Luib spans the Ledcharrie Burn. [33] The second is Edravinoch Bridge which was a girder bridge which once spanned the Luib Burn. The aboutments remain but the girders were removed for scrap on closure of the line. [34] Bothe the pictures below were taken by John Gray and shared by him on the Re-Appreciate the Callander & Oban Line Facebook Group on 4th October 2018. John Gray’s photographs are reproduced here with his kind permission.
Ledcharrie Viaduct. [33]Edravinoch Bridge. [34]
The next station on the old railway was Luib Railway Station in Glen Dochart.
River, road and railway in close proximity at Luib Railway Station. The 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1898, published in 1901. [30]The site of Luib Railway station is, in the 21st century, Glen Dochart Holiday Park. [15]
This view looking West from Luib Railway Station is embedded from Ernie’s Railway Archive on Flickr, (c) J.M. Boyce. Note the signal box and the stone water tower base. [31]The old road alignment and under bridge to the West of the Luib Railway Station site. [35]Just to the West of Luib Railway Station the line crossed what became the A85. There is no clear indication on the groud of the location of the bridge as road improvements have swept away the vestiges of the old railway in the immediate vicinity. [Google Maps, November 2024]
Gairns continues:
“Westward past Luib to Crianlarich, Glen Dochart is traversed, with the River Dochart, until it merges into Loch Iubhair, succeeded in turn by Loch Dochart, and the public road, for company close alongside. Here splendid views are hard on both sides, bare mountain slopes being relieved by wooded areas, while rushing burns and streamlets add further interest. On both sides are peaks of considerable height, notably Ben Dheiceach (3,074 ft.) to the North, Ben More (3,843 ft.) immediately ahead, and Stobinian (3,821 ft.) to the South, with many others in the distance.
Crianlarich is important as it provides for interchange traffic with the West Highland line to Fort William and Mallaig, which here crosses. The stations are within a short distance, and there is siding connection for interchange goods traffic. The Callander and Oban station is a neatdouble-platformed station with rather attractive buildings on the down side, Just beyond the station the North British Railway crosses by an overbridge, and Crianlarich Junction is then reached, this controlling the connection with the West Highland line.” [1: p12-13]
Two different railways crossed at Crianlarich. The Callander & Oban Railway ran East-West. The West Highland Line ran North-South. The East-West line and station were opened on 1st August 1873 by the Callander and Oban Railway. This was the first railway station in Crianlarich. The station was originally laid out with two platforms, one on either side of a crossing loop. There were sidings on the south side of the station. After the West Highland Railway opened in 1894, Crianlarich could boast two railway stations. The West Highland Railway crossed over the Callander and Oban Railway by means of a viaduct located a short distance west of the Lower station. The West Highland Railway’s Crianlarich station was (and still is) located a short distance south of this viaduct. [36]The two lines plotted on the modern satellite imagery provided by RailMapOnline.com. The blue line being the Callander and Oban Railway, the red line being the West Highland Line. The link line between the two stations/railways was put in by the West Highland Line and is shown in red. [15]
Crianlarich Junction was situated half a mile west of Crianlarich Lower station. Opened on 20th December 1897, the junction was located at one end of a short link line that ran to Crianlarich station on the West Highland Railway. There were two signal boxes: “Crianlarich Junction East” (32 levers) and “Crianlarich Junction West” (18 levers). Following closure of the line east from Crianlarich Lower, the line between there and Crianlarich Junction was retained as a siding, with the link line becoming the main line for trains to and from Oban. [37]
Crianlarich Lower Railway Station on the Callander and Oban Railway. The picture appears to have been taken in circa. the 1920s. Note that by this time the second platform and the loop had been removed. It is also [possible to see the high level viaduct which carried the West Highland line over the road (A85), the Callander and Oben Railway and the River Fillan. This image was shared by Brian Previtt on the Disused Stations Facebook Group on 25th October 2024, (c) photographer not known, Public Domain. [38]
The line to the West of Crianlarich Junction remains in use in the 21st century.
Gairns continues his description of the line:
“Onwards through Strath Fillan magnificent views are had, and for some miles the West Highland line runs parallel, but on the opposite side of the valley, climbing up the hillside, after crossing the viaduct over the River Fillan until both lines are almost on the same level, with the valley between. Both lines have stations at Tyndrum (a favourite mountain resort), though these are some half-a-mile apart. The Callander and Oban station is a neat tree-shaded [location], with the goods yard at a lower level.” [1: p13]
The Callander & Oban Railway’s Tyndrum Railway Station sat to the South of the Hotel which the West Highland Line’s station to the North. [39]
Wikipedia tells us that Tyndrum Lower Station “opened on 1st August 1873 as a terminal station. This was the first railway station in the village of Tyndrum. Until 1877, it was the western extremity of the Callander and Oban Railway. In 1877, the Callander and Oban Railway was extended from Tyndrum to Dalmally. Concurrently, the station was relocated 301 yards (275 m) west, onto the new through alignment. The new station was on a higher level, as the line had to climb steeply to reach the summit about 0.6 miles (1 km) to the west. The old terminus then became the goods yard. The through station was originally laid out with two platforms, one on each side of a passing loop.” [40]
Tyndrum Lower and Upper Tyndrum Railway Stations can be seen on this extract from RailMapOnline.com’s satellite imagery. The image shows the route(also in blue) of a tramroad which served Tyndrum Lead Mines and Glengarry Lead Smelter (a little to the East of Tyndrum). After the closure of the smelter transfer to wagons of the Callander & Oban Railway took place at Tyndrum Lower Railway Station. [15]Tyndrum Lower Railway Station in 2015 – a single platform Halt. The platform is on the North side of the line. This view looks East toward Crianlarich, (c) Alex17595 and made available under a Creative Commons Licence (CC BY-SA 4.0). [41]Looking West along the line from the access road/carpark at Tyndrum Lower Railway Station. [Google Streetview, April 2011]
Gairns’ description of the line continues:
“Passing Tyndrum station a final view is had of the West Highland line [before] it turns its course northwards, while the Callander and Oban line makes a long sweep southwesterly through Glen Lochy, wild and bare. An intermediate crossing, Glenlochy breaks the 12-mile run from Tyndrum to Dalmally. Approaching the rather pretty station at the latter place, Glen Orchy is joined, fine views being had along it. Dalmally, at the foot of Glen Orchy, has been described as ‘the loveliest spot in all that lovely glen’. A short run of less than 3 miles crossing the Orchy and rounding a bay on Loch Awe, and incidentally giving beautiful views up the Loch, and Loch Awe station is reached, right on the water side, and with a pier alongside for the steamers which ply along the Loch. For four miles or so the line runs high on the base at Ben Cruachan and follows the shores of the Loch through the gloomy Pass of Brander in which the waters of the loch merge into the brawling River Awe most turbulent of Highland salmon streams, Three miles beyond Loch Awe station the Falls of Cruachan Platform is a convenience for visitors to the celebrated Falls, a glimpse of which is had from the train in passing. The crossing place is, however, Awe Crossing, a mile or so beyond. A further run of 41 miles and Taynuilt is reached, beyond which the shores of Loch Etive are followed to Connel Ferry, a run of 64 miles, with one intermediate station – Ach-na-Cloich – and providing lovely views over the loch and the hills and mountains. beyond.” [1: p13]
Glenlochy Crossing, which Gairns describes as “An intermediate crossing, Glenlochy breaks the 12-mile run from Tyndrum to Dalmally.” This image shows what is recorded on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1898, published in 1900. [41]The same location as it appears in the 21st century on the ESRI satellite imagery provided by the NLS. The site of Glenlochy Crossing is in the trees close to the centre of this image. which runs diagonally down the centre portion of the imageof this image. The A85 runs to the West of the old railway’s route which runs diagonally down the centre portion of the image. The River Lochy passes immediately to the West of Glenlochy Crossing (left of centre). [41]
Glenlochy Crossing was a passing loop opened in 1882 to increase the capacity of the line. It broke the singl-track section between Tyndrum Lower and Dalmally. The building shown just to the East of the line was similar to that found at other crossings (such as Drumvaich Crossing and Awe Crossing0. It combined a railway cottage with a signal cabin. When first built the loop had two trailing sidings one at each end of the loop. We know that the loop was lifted in 1966 when the building was also demolished. There is still a footbridge across the River Lochy which gave access to the Crossing but that is now locked against public access. [42]
The Callander & Oban Railway closely followed the South bank Of the River Lochy, only turning away to the South to cross Eas a Ghaill (a tributary which approached the River Lochy from the South) by means of Succoth Viaduct.
Succoth Viaduct. This is an embedded link to an image on the GetLostMountaineering.co.uk webpage. The viaduct carries what was the Callander & Oban Railway over Eas a Ghaill. [43]
The line runs almost due West from Succoth Viaduct at a distance from the River Lochy until it reaches Dalmally Railway Station.
Dalmally Railway Station as it appears on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897, published in 1900. [44]Dalmally Railway Station as it appears on the satellite imagery provided by RailMapOnline.com. [15]Looking West through Dalmally Railway Station, this mage was shared by Donald Taggart on Google Maps, (c) Donald Taggart (March 2020)A similar view of the station buildings at Dalmally from Platform No. 2, (c) Anna-Mária Palinčárová. (June 2017), shared by her on Google Maps.
This photograph was taken from the Road overbridge at the West end of Dalmally Railway Station site, (c) inett (November 2017) and shared on Google Maps.
the road overbridge at the West end of Dalmally Station site seen from the ned of Platform No. 1, (c) Marian Kalina (November 2017) and shared on Google Maps.
The Station approach, seen from the West, Dalmally. [Google Streetview, November 2021]The road over the bridge at the West end of Dalmally Railway Station site. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
West of Dalmally the line ran on towards a viaduct which crossed the River Lochy at Drishaig. However, we need to note that the road layout in this immediate area is considerably different to what was present at the turn of the 20th century.
The Southeast approach to the viaduct over the River Orchy as it appears on the 1897 Ordnance Survey, published in 1900. [46]The smae area as it appears on the 21st century RailMapOnline.om satellite imagery with two roads appearing where non were evident at the turn of the 20th century. [15]The view East from the bridge carrying the A819 over the railway. [Google Streetview, November 2021]The view West from the bridge carrying the A819 over the railway. [Google Streetview, November 2021]
Just a short distance to the West, the line crossed the River Orchy at the East end of Loch Awe.
Further West of Dalmally, the line bridged the River Orchy at Drishaig. The mineral Railway which branched off the Callander & Oban Railway at Drishaig served the Ben Chruachan Quarry which was high on the East flank of Ben Chruachan. [45]The same location as it appears in satellite imagery in the 21st century. [15]An aerial image of Lochawe Railway Bridge with the A85 bridge behind. This aerial image was shared on Google Maps in September 2022, (c) Kevin Newton. [Google Maps, November 2024]Lochawe Railway Bridge seen from ground level. This image was shared on Google Mpas in April 2021, (c) Wojciech Suszko. [Google Maps, November 2024]
The Ben Cruachan Quarry Branch was standard-gauge and ran North from Drishaig. It is shown here as it appears on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897, published in 1900. The line North from Drishaig appears on the map extract on the left. [47]
Ben Cruachan Quarry itself, shown on the next 6″ OS Map Sheet. The quarry was on the eastern slopes of Ben Cruachan. The full extent of the quarry’s internal railways is not shown. [48].
Ben Cruachan Quarry was multi-levelled and was accessed by the railway which zig-zagged to gain height. The RailScot website rells us that”The ground frame for this short Ben Cruachan Quarries Branch (Callander and Oban Railway) was released by a tablet from Loch Awe station for the section to Dalmally. The quarry had its own pair of 0-4-0ST locomotives.” [49]
Just a short distance Southwest of Drishaig was the Lochawe Hotel which had its own railway station alongside the Loch.
Lochawe Railway Station and Hotel in 1897 as shown on the 6″ Ordnance Survey sheet of that year. [50]The same location as shown on the satellite imagery of RailMapOnline.com. [15]A postcard view of Lochawe Railway Station and Hotel, (c) Public Do9main. [52]Lochawe Railway Station in 2015. The removed second platform can be seen easily, (c) Tom Parnell and licenced for reuse under a Creative Commons Licence (CC BY-SA 2.0). [51]
The line ran across the North shore of Loch Awe to a Halt named for the Falls of Cruachan – Falls of Churachan Platform.
The Falls of Cruachan Platform as shown on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897. [50]The same location in the 21st century. There is a significant hydro electric scheme at this location which has a visitor centre and its own Railway Station – Falls of Cruachan Railway Station. [15]A train approaching Falls of Cruachan Railway Station from the West in 2024, (c) Alex Morgan. (July 2024)The Falls of Cruachan Railway Station sat immediately above and t the North of the A85, (c) Alex Morgan. (July 2024)
The line continues West/Northwest along the Northside of the River Awe. It crosses the river just North of The Bridge of Awe. Just prior to reaching the Viaduct the line bridged the minor road which served properties on the North side of the River Awe.
The bridge over the minor road mentioned above – seen from the Southwest. [Google Streetview, May 2022]The bridge over the minor road mentioned above – seen from the Northeast. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
A matter of not much more than a couple of hundred metres to the West of the minor road, the line bridges the River Awe.
The Bridge of Awe with the Railway Viaduct just to the North, as they appear on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897, published in 1900. [53]
The same location on RailMapOnline.com’s satellite imagery. [15]An aerial image of the railway viaduct. [54]
The railway viaduct over the River Awe. Network Rail Undertook a £3.5m project to refurbish Awe viaduct in 2024/25. The viaduct is a three-span wrought iron viaduct, completed in 1879. During the 7-month project, engineers replaced the timber deck (which supports the track). They removed the old paint, carry out repairs to the metallic parts of the structure and repainted those parts of the structure to protect against rusting. [54]
Over the river, the line heads for Taynuilt.
The A85 runs directly alongside the line on the approach to Taynuilt. This photograph looks Northwest along the road/railway. [Google Streetview, May 2022]Taynuilt village and Railway Station as they appear on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897. [53]The same length of the line as it is shown on the RailMapOnline.com satellite imagery. [15]
On the way into Taynuilt the line crosses a minor road which serves the East end of the village. That road can be seen at the righthand side of the satellite image and the map extract above.
The minor road bridge seen from the Northwest. [Google Streetview, Novermber 2021]The minor road bridge seen from the Southeast. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
The next bridge spans the railway adjacent to Taynuilt Railway Station it carries the B845.
The view East along the line from the B845 overbridge. [Google Streetview, May 2022]The view West from the B845 into Taynuilt Railway Station. [Google Streetview, May 2022]The view East from Taynuilt Railway Station to the bridge carrying the B845 over the line, (c) Robert Hamilton (October 2017). [Google maps, November 2024]Taynuilt Railwaty Station forecourt. [Google Streetview, November 2021]The view East from the A85 towards Taynuilt Railway Station. [Google Streetview, May 2022]The view West from the A85. [Google Streetview, May 2022]
A little further to the West the railway passes under the A85 again.
The bridge over the railway in 1897. [53]The bridge over the railway in 2024. [53]Looking West along the A85 showing the parapets of the bridge over the Callander & Oban Railway. {Google Streetview, November 2021]
The line now drops down to the shores of Loch Etive and in due course arrives at Auch-na-Cloich.
In 1897, the station at Auch-na-Cloich bore the name ‘Ach-na-Cloich, as the 6″ OS map extract shows. It bore that name right through to closure on 1st November 1965. [55][56]The remaining buildings at Ach-na-Cloich, seen from the public road adjacent to Loch Etive. [Google Streetview, April 2011]
The line continues to hug the shore of Loch Etive passing over the A85 a couple of local roads on its way to Connel Ferry Railway Station.
The next bridge over the A85,seen from the Northwest. [Google Streetview, November 2021]
The next image comes form Gairns’ article in The Railway Magazine and shows a train approaching Connel Ferry from the East.
In its heyday when it served a branch to Ballachulish, Connel Ferry Railway Station had three platforms, a goods yard and a turntable. Later this was reduced to just the single platform, after the branch closed in 1966, [64] as it remains today. [63][65]
As we have already noted, the journey along the branch can be followed by reading articles elsewhere on this blog. We will continue our journey with Gairns along the main line to Oban. ….
Gairns continues
“At Connel Ferry, junction for the Ballachulish line, there is a wide island platform serving the up and down main lines, and a single platform on the up side designed for branch trains, though generally these use the main platform to facilitate passenger and luggage transfer. The station has sidings and [a] goods yard. Its height above the village entails high viaducts both on the Oban line and on the approach to the famous Connel Ferry bridge, crossed by Ballachulish trains. Fine views are had of the bridge from the Oban line as it pursues its course high up on the hillside until it cuts inland to attain the summit of Glencruitten. This is at the top of the 3-mile incline at 1 in 50 by which the line zig-zags down to reach the shore at Oban, giving views now over Oban and the landward hills above it, and then, with final sweep round, over the Kerrera Sound and Kerrera Island, to the mountains of Mull and the Firth of Lorne.
Before reaching the terminus a stop is usually made at Oban ticket platform, adjacent to the goods yard and engine shed. Oban station has picturesque build ings surmounted by a clock tower, and the circulating area is adorned with hanging flower baskets. Refreshment and dining rooms are provided. The three main platforms are partly covered by a glazed all-over roof, though their outer curved portions are open. Alongside are two open arrival platforms permitting cabs, &c., to come directly alongside the trains, The station is immediately alongside the steamer pier and harbour premises, the location being peculiarly convenient to the principal hotels, the sea front, and the Corran Esplanade.
Oban – ‘a little bay’ – so widely favoured as a holiday resort, as a boating and yachting centre, and as headquarters for touring the Highlands and the Hebrides in all directions, has been described as the ‘Charing Cross of the Highlands’. Whether readers will agree with this as a happy choice or not, it certainly justifies it as a great steamer traffic and touring centre. Messrs. David MacBrayne, Ltd., operate steamers between Oban, the Sound of Mull and Tobermory to Castlebay and Lochboisdale (‘Inner Island Service’), Ardrishaig via the Crinan Canal, to Staffa and Iona, to Ballachulish, Kentallen and Fort William, and thence via the Caledonian Canal to Inverness, besides many local trips and excursions.” [1: p13-15]
Connel Ferry is the last station before Oban. The railway line runs behind (South of) Connel and then turns away from the coast and the A85.
The line Southwest of Connel Ferry Railway Station, as shown on railmaponline.com’s satellite imagery. [15]This extract from the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897, published in 1900 shows the next bridge on the line where a local road passes under the railway. [66]A similar area in the 21st century. [Google Maps, December 2024]The bridge shown on the Ordnance Survey extract and on the modern satellite image from Googlee Maps. This view looks Northwest along the lane under the bridge from the Southeast. [Google Streetview, November 2021]Looking Southeast along the lane this time. Google Streetview, November 2021]The next length of the line as shown on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897, published in 1900. [66]
Trains encounter a number of accommodation bridges/underpasses which allow field access under the line of the railway. The one shown below, at the highest magnification possible from the public highway, is typical of one type of culvert.
A narrow lane approaches the railway from the Northand an underpass sits to the East of the road where there is a slight gaps in the trees. [Google Maps, December 2024]A typical farm/field access under the railway. [Google Streetview, November 2021]
Just a short distance Southwest is another underpass, this time of stone arch construction.
A further underbridge constructed as a stone arch. [Google Streetview, June 2011]The narrow highway is in the top-left of this staellite image – the stone-arch bridge is just to the right of centre. [Google Maps, December 2024]The next length of the line as shown on railmaponline.com’s satellite imagery. [15]
Another few hundred metres to the Southwest a further underpass is a girder bridge.
The highway and the railway are in close proximity at this location. [Google Maps, December 2024]Looking Southeast under the railway, rather than being a stone arch this underpass is a girder bridge. [Google Streetview, June 2011]
The next underpass is a stone arched structure.
The next underpass is only just visible from the road. [Google Streetview, June 2011]It is located bottom-right of this image. [Google Maps, December 2024]
These two locations appear on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897. …
The next length of the railway as shown on the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1897, published 1900. [67]These two extracts (this and the one above) from the 6″ Ordnance Survey take us as far along the railway as the last railmaponline.com satellite image above. [68]The railway cottages in the 21st century. [Google Streetview, November 2021]The railway cottages in the 21st century. [Google Maps, December 2024]The next loength of the line as it appears on railmaponline.com’s satellite imagery. The outskirts of Oban can be seem on the left of the image. [15]Two extracts from the 6″ Ordnance Survey take us almost as far at the length of line on the railmaponline.com satellite imagery above. [68]This third extract from the 6″ Ordnance Survey completes the length covered by the railmaponline.com satellite image above and covers the length on the right on the satellite image below. [69]The final length of the line into Oban as shown by railmaponline.com. [15]This extract from the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1898 covers the length of the line on the bottom half of the satellite image above. [69]Looking South out of Oban along the A816, Soroba Road, The railway crosses the road on a simply supported girder bridge. [Google Streetview, May 2022]This extract from the 6″ Ordnance Survey of 1898 shows the final length of the line and the two stations (passenger and goods) which existed at the turn of the 20th century. [69]The same area as it appears on Google Maps in the 21st century. Glenshellach Terrace marks the north side of what was the Goods Station. [Google Maps, December 2024]
Running into Oban the line is crossed by three road bridges:
For the sake of completeness, we note that Gairns’ narrative returns to Connel Ferry for commentary on the Ballachulish Branch.
“Commencing at Connel Ferry station, the branch train reaches the famous bridge by a viaduct approach over the village of Connel Ferry. The Connel Ferry bridge, claimed to be the Forth Bridge’s ‘biggest British rival’, was opened for traffic on 21st August 1903. The bridge, which is of cantilever type (hence the analogy suggested with the Forth Bridge), has a length of 524 ft. between the two piers, the clear span being 500 ft., and the headway above high-water level, 50 ft. Extreme height from high water to the topmost point of the bridge is 125 ft., while the middle span, carried by the two cantilever spans, has a length of 232 ft. This bridge not only enabled a district hitherto most inconveniently situated in regard to rail traffic to be placed in communication with the Callander and Oban Railway at Connel Ferry, but provided a means of crossing Loch Etive, where previously a very lengthy detour had to be made to get from one side to the other, the only alternative being a very uncertain ferryservice,
The difficulty having been solved from the railway point of view, there still remained the problem of providing for the transit of motor-cars and other road vehicles across the Loch, and for several years after the opening of the bridge the Caledonian Railway Company conveyed private motor-cars across the bridge by placing them on flat trucks and hauling them, passengers included, by road motor vehicles adapted to run on rails across the bridge.
This … was continued for a considerable time, but, several years ago, the Caledonian Railway Company adopted the alternative method of adapting the bridge also for the passage of motor vehicles, cycles, etc., under their own power. There is not, however, sufficient room for a roadway clear of the railway track, so that it is necessary to restrict the passage of road vehicles to periods when no train is signalled. At eachend of the bridge, therefore gates under the control of the bridge keeper, are provided to close the bridge to road traffic when a train is due, and the tablet instruments are controlled by electric circuits in connection with the road gates, to ensure that unless the gates are properly closed, a tablet cannot be used. The roadway over the bridge comes close up to the rails, there being just sufficient room for a vehicle to pass between the rails and the side of bridge, and the bridgekeeper has to see that vehicles from both directions are not allowed on the bridge at the same time. These facilities apply only to private motor-cars and horse-drawn vehicles, and not trade vehicles, of either class. Cyclists and pedestrians also use the bridge. In each case the crossing of the bridge is subject to toll, the men in charge at the Connel Ferry and Benderloch ends acting as toll-keepers. … In August [1922], the bridge was used by 6,009 foot passengers, by 852 motor-cars, and by 290 cycles. [1: p15-16]
Gairns continues:
“Passing North Connel halt, at the North end of the bridge, the line follows the shore to Benderloch station. At Barcaldine Crossing a platform is provided, where trains call as required. So far, the country traversed has been ‘comparatively’ flat and uninteresting, but as it crosses a peninsula to reach the shores of Loch Creran, mountain vistas again open up. Short of Creagan station the line crosses the Narrows to the Loch by a two-span girder bridge with approach viaducts, fine views being had on both sides.
Again crossing a peninsula. Appin is reached, and for the remainder of the journey the line follows closely the shores of Loch Linnhe. As it curves round after leaving Appin station, a good view is had of the ruins of Castle Stalker. Alongside the Loch splendid views are had, and Duror and Kentallen stations are sufficiently picturesque to harmonise with the general character of the scenery. At Ballachulish Ferry station tickets are collected, and the line then curves round to follow the shores of Loch Leven to the terminus at Ballachulish. This is a neat two-platformed station, with dining and refreshment rooms, and the district is impressively mountainous. A short distance from the station is a small harbour, whence a David MacBrayne steamerused to ply three times daily to and from the Kinlochleven wharf of the British Aluminium Company, for goods, passenger and mail traffic. This steamer service has now been withdrawn, a road having been built by German prisoners during the [First World War] and opened for traffic at the end of [1922].” [1: p16]
As noted close to the start of this article, the Ballachulish Branch has been covered extensively in an earlier series of articles which can be found here, [2] here, [3] here, [4] and here. [5]
Gairns goes on to reflect on the use of the Callander and Oban line. He says that its use is “complicated by the fact that its gradients are systematically so severe.” [1: p16] Indeed 1 in 50 gradients occurred:
“several times for considerable distances, curves are numerous, and in several places reduced speed is necessary owing to the danger of tumbling rocks, notably alongside Loch Lubnaig in Glen Ogle and the Pass of Brander, and automatic alarm wires are erected on some stretches, a fall of rock encountering them causing warnings to be given in adjacent signal cabins and watchmen’s huts, and putting the special signals to danger. On the steep grades both goods and passenger trains are operated under special restrictions, stops being made at the summits and brakes tested, or, on goods trains, a proportion pinned down before descending. Mountain mists and fogs, occasional torrential rainstorms or cloudbursts and other ‘episodes’ peculiar to mountain lines, also complicate the working at times. But even in winter there is a steady traffic in meeting the transport needs of the wide areas rendered accessible by this line, of the various townships and villages (many are centres for other places within a considerable radius), country houses, castles and large estates, and in carrying mails, supplying coal and, in due season, conveying cattle and other live stock.
The winter train services are, naturally, much reduced as compared with those of the summer, but even the winter service provides four through trains each way daily, a local each way between Oban and Dalmally, and several additional trains between Callander and Glasgow. Sleeping cars and through carriages are provided between Euston and Oban in winter on Fridays only from London, returning on Mondays. The down vehicles are conveyed on the 8.25 a.m. from Stirling, due in Oban at 12.15 p.m. It is also possible to reach Oban at 4.45 p.m. from London by the 11 p.m. from Euston the night before, and by the 5 a.m. from Eustonat 9.50 p.m., the same night, though not, of course, with through carriages.” [1: p16-17]
Gairns goes on to cover train movements on the line in some detail. While the copious detail he provided need not detain us here, it is worth noting the care with which connections to the various railway branches, steamer and motor-coach services associated with the main line were arranged. There were also a significant number of excursions and tours to suit passenger’s differing budgets.
Gairns’ final paragraph concentrated on the motive power in use on the line in the early 1920s and is worth recording here:
“The locomotives generally employed are the well-known ‘Oban’ 4-6-0s, with 5-ft. coupled wheels, together with Mr. Pickersgill’s new ‘Oban’ class recently introduced, though odd trips are taken by 0-6-0 goods engines, which also render assistance on the steep grades. On the Killin branch and the Ballachulish extension 0-4-4 tank engines of the 4 ft. 6 in. class are used. Between Dunblane and Callander main line 4-4-0 locomotives from Glasgow or Stirling and 0-6-0 goods engines are used, as well as the Oban 4-6-0s on the through trains, a change being sometimes made at Callander. The Callander and Oban line and the Ballachulish extension are controlled by electric train tablet apparatus. Ordinary train staff is used on the Killin branch.” [1: p18]
References
G.F. Gairns; The Callandar and Oban Railway; in The Railway Magazine, London, July 1923, p10-17
John Thomas; The Callander &Oban Railway: The History of the Railways of the Scottish Highlands – Vol. 4; David St. John Thomas Publisher, Nairn, Scotland, 1966, 1990 and 1991.
Huddleston looks at a number of different sections of the network and after looking at what he has to say about each we will endeavour to follow those railway routes as they appear in the 21st century. We will go into quite a bit of detail on the journey along the Kalka to Shimla narrow-gauge line. The featured image at the head of this post was taken at Taradevi Railway Station on the Kalka to Shimla line, (c) GNU Free Documentation Licence Version 1.2. [29]
Shikohabad to Farrukhabad
This branch line had, in 1906, recently been opened. Huddleston describes it as being 65 miles in length, running through the district of Manipuri from Shekoabad [sic] to Farukhabad on the River Ganges. Until 1906, Farukhabad [sic] had “only been served by the metre gauge line which skirts the river to Cawnpore.There was lots of traffic in the district and both the broad and metre gauge lines completed for it, whilst the river and canals and camels compete with the railways.” [1: p40]
The journey from Shikohabad to Farrukhabad. Indian Railways spellings of the two locations differ from those used by Huddleston in 1906. [4]
We start this relatively short journey (of 63 miles) at Shikohabad Junction Railway Station. “The old name of Shikohabad was Mohammad Mah (the name still exists as Mohmmad mah near Tahsil and Kotwali). Shikohabad is named after Dara Shikoh, the eldest brother of Emperor Aurangzeb. In its present form, the town has hardly any recognisable evidence of that era. Shikohabad was ruled under the estate of Labhowa from 1794 to 1880.” [5] “Shikohabad Junction railway station is on the Kanpur-Delhi section of Howrah–Delhi main line and Howrah–Gaya–Delhi line. It is located in Firozabad district in the Indian state of Uttar Pradesh.” [6] The station opened in1866. “A branch line was opened from Shikohabad to Mainpuri in 1905 and extended to Farrukhabad in 1906.” [7]
Shikohabad Junction Railway Station, Uttar Pradesh. [Google Maps, October 2024]Shikohabad Junction Railway Station (c) Mohit Yadav. (2022)Shikohabad Junction Railway Station (c) Anshu Yadavv. (2021)
Trains from Shikohabad set off for Farrukhabad in a southeasterly direction alongside the Delhi to Kolkata main line. In a very short distance as the railway passed under a road flyover (Shikohabad Junction Flyover) the line to Farrukhabad moved away from the main line on its Northside.
The rail bridge carrying the Farrukhabad line over the Lower Ganga Canal seen from a point to the North alongside the canal. [Google Streetview, May 2023]Looking East-Northeast along the railway towards Farrukhabad from the AH1 Flyover. [Google Streetview, May 2023]Basdeomai, Uttar Pradesh. The covered way either side of the underpass is typical of many locations where local roads cross railways. This view looks Northwest across the railway. [Google Streetview, May 2023]looking Southwest along the railway. [Google Streetview, May 2023]Looking Northeast along the railway [Google Streetview, May 2023]
The first stopping point on the line is at Burha Bharthara. As can be seen immediately below, it is little more than a ‘bus-stop’ sign!
Burha Bharthara, (c) Dev Kumar. (2018)Burha Bharthara. [Google Maps, October 2024]
Very soon after Burha Bharthara, trains pull into Aroan Railway Station which is a little more substantial that Burha Bharthara having a single building with a ticket office.
Aroan Railway Station, (c) Rajput Boy. (2019]Aroan Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]
Takha Railway Station is next along the line.
Takha Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]The view East-northeast from Takha Railway Station, (c) Ketan Gupta. [October 2021 – Google Maps]
A couple of hundred meters short of Kosma Railway Station, the line crosses the Karhal to Ghiror Road at a level-crossing.
The level-crossing which takes the line across the Karhal to Ghiror Road, seen from the South. [Google Streeview, October 2023]Looking East from the level-crossing towards Kosma Railway Station. [Google Streetview, October 2023]
Kosma Railway Station provides a passing loop to allow trains travelling in opposite directions to cross.
Kosma Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Kosma Railway Station, (c) Rajat Singh, April 2023. [Google Maps, October 2024]The railway bridges an irrigation canal, (another arm of the Lower Ganga Canal (?)), a little to the East of Kosma Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]
A short distance further to the East is Tindauli Railway Station, after which the line crosses another arm the Lower Ganga Canal.
Tindauli Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Another arm of the Lower Ganga Canal. [Google Maps, October 2024]
Further East the line crosses a number of roads, most now culverted under the line.
This is a view East from one of the more minor crossing points near Auden Padariya (not far West of the junction on the approach to Mainpuri) which has yet to have an underbridge constructed and still had its crossing gates in 2023. [Google Streetview, May 2023]Passing under the Auden Mandal- Kharpari Bypass, the line meets the line from Etawah before running into Mainpuri Junction Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Mainpuri Junction Railway Station. [Google Earth, October 2024]Mainpuri Junction Railway Station, (c) Surabhl Study. (2022)Mainpuri Junction Railway Station, (c) Narendra Singh Chauhan. (2023)Mainpuri Railway Station seen from the level-crossing on the Mainpuri-Kishni Road at the station limits. [Google Streetview, May 2023]
To the East of Mainpuri Railway Station, the next station is Mainpuri Kachehri Railway Station, just to the East of the Sugaon to Husenpur Road.
Mainpuri Kachehri Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Mainpuri Kachehri Railway Station, (c) Protkarsh Kumar – still from video (2022), [8]Mainpuri Kachehri Railway Station, (c) Protkarsh Kumar – still from video (2022), [8]
The next station was Bhongaon Railway Station which had a passing loop to allow trains to cross.
Looking East towards Bhongaon Railway Station from a couple of hundred metres to the West of the Station. [Google Streetview, May 2023]Bhongaon Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Bhongaon Railway Station. [9]Bhongaon Railway Station. [9]Just at the East end of the station site the Aligarh-Kanpur Road (Grand Trunk Road) crosses the line at level. This is the view from the level-crossing, East towards Farrukhabad. [Google Streetview, May 2023]A short distance further East the line passes under the newly constructed Bypass. This view looks back under the modern viaduct towards Bhongoan Railway Station. [Google Streetview, May 2023]
Continuing on towards Farrukhabad, it is only a matter of a few minutes before trains pass through Takhrau Railway Station, where facilities are basic, and Mota Railway Station where facilites are a little more substantive.
Takhrau Railway Station building. (c) Pankaj Kumar, August 2017. [Google Maps, October 2024]Mota Railway Station, (c) Vinod Kumar, May 2023. [Google Maps, October 2024]
The Railway then bridges the Kaali Nadi River and passes through Pakhna Railway Station.
The railway bridge over the (c) Shiv Shankar, January 2020. [Google Maps, October 2024]Pakhna Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Pakhna Railway Station, (c) Gaurav Singh. (2021)Pakhna Railway Station, (c) Gaurav Singh. (2021)
The next stop is at B L Daspuri (Babal Axmandaspuri) Station.
Babal Axmandaspuri Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Babal Axmandaspuri Railway Station, (c) Rajat Singh (September 2023). [Google Maps, October 2024]
Another short journey gets us to Nibkarori Railway Station.
Nibkarori Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Nibkarori Railway Station seen from the Northeast, (c) Rakesh Verma (July 2021). [Google maps, October 2024]
The next stop is at Ugarpur Railway Station.
Ugarpur Railway Station. [Google Maps. October 2024]Ugarpur Railway Station, (c) Desh Deepak Dixit (December 2017). [Google Maps. October 2024]
Not much further along the line we enter Shrimad Dwarakapuri Railway Station.
Shrimad Dwarakapuri Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]
As the line reaches the town of Farrukhabad it turns sharply to the North.
On the South side of Farrukhabad the line turns to the Northwest. [Google Maps, October 2024]
It then enters Farrukhabad Junction Railway Station from the Southeast.
Farrukhabad Junction Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Farrukhabad Railway Station (c) Anil Yadav7883 (2022)Farrukhabad Railway Station (c) Qazim Khan (2022)Farrukhabad Railway Station (c) Provas Rautroy (2021)
Farrukhabad sits on the River Ganges. It is a historic city with a rich culture defined by the traditions of Ganga-Jamuni Tehzeeb (Ganges-Yamuna Culture), [10] which amalgamates aspects of Hindu and Muslim cultural practices, rituals, folk and linguistic traditions. [11] The city was begun in 1714, and Mohammad Khan Bangash (a commander in the successful army of Farrukhsiyar, one of the princely contenders for the Mughal throne, who led a coup which displaced the reigning emperor Jahandar Shah) named it after Farrukhsiyar. It soon became a flourishing centre of commerce and industry. [12]
Initially, under the colonial state of British India, Farrukhabad was a nodal centre of the riverine trade through the Ganges river system from North and North-West India towards the East. [12] Farrukhabad’s economic and political decline under British rule began with the closure of the Farrukhabad mint in 1824. [11]
Farrukhabad, according to the 2011 census had a population of 1,885,204. This was just under four times its size in 1901. Its population is predominantly Hindu. [13]
At the time of the 2011 Census of India, 94.96% of the population in the district spoke Hindi (or a related language) and 4.68% Urdu as their first language. [14]
Tundla to Agra
“From Shekoabad, it is only a matter of 22 miles to Tundla but very few people would ever hear about Tundla, if it was not for the fact that it is the junction for Agra. …Agra would have been on the main line if the East Indian Railway had the original intention been followed of taking the line across the Jumna river at Agra and then following its right bank into Delhi; but, instead of doing this, it was decided … to build only a branch to Agra, and to run the main line on the left side of the Jumna. … If we want to visit Agra, we must change at Tundla and go along the 14 mile of the branch line.” [1: p41]
Huddleston tells us that:
“Approaching Agra … from Tundla you see [the Taj Mahal] first on your left-hand side, wrapped in that peculiar atmospheric haze that adds charm to every distant object in the East, a charm even to that which needs no added charm, the marvellous and wonderful Taj Mehal [sic]. As you rapidly draw nearer it seems to rise before you in solitary dazzling grandeur, its every aspect changing as the remorseless train, which you cannot stop, dashes on. Once catch your first glimpse of the Taj and you have eyes for. nothing else, you feel that your very breath has gone, that you are in a dream. All the world seems unreal, and the beautiful construction before you more unreal than all. You only know it is like something you have heard of, something, perhaps, in a fairy tale, or something you have read of, possibly in allegory, and you have hardly time to materialise before the train rattles over the Jumna Bridge, and enters Agra Fort station.
There on one side are the great red walls of the fortress within a few feet of you, and there on the other side is the teeming native city, with its mosques and domes and minarets, its arches and columns and pillars. its thousand and one Oriental sights, just the reality of the East, but all quite different to everywhere else. … There are things to be seen in Agra that almost outrival the Taj itself, such, for instance, as the tomb of Ihtimad-ud-Daula, on the East bank of the river, with its perfection of marble carving, unequalled in delicacy by anything of the kind in the world. There are delightful places nearby of absorbing interest, as, for example, Fatehpur Sikri, and its abandoned city of palaces; there is enough in Agra and its vicinity to glut a glutton at sight seeing, but we must go back to the railway and its work. The Jumna Bridge, of which we have talked, belongs to the Rajputana Railway; the rails are so laid that both broad and metre gauge trains run over it, and above the track for trains there is a roadway.
But this is not sufficient for the needs of Agra, though supplemented by a pontoon bridge which crosses the river half a mile further up the stream. The trade of Agra first attracted the East Indian Railway, then came the Rajputana Malwa, and then the Great Indian Peninsular. Each of the latter two lines wanted a share, and the East Indian had to fight for its rights; to do its utmost to keep to the Port of Calcutta what the rival lines wanted to take to Bombay. Another railway bridge became a necessity, a bridge that would take the East Indian Railway line into the heart of the native city instead of leaving it on its outskirts, and the East Indian Railway began to construct it.” [1: p42-43]
In 1906 the new bridge over the River Jumna was under construction, due to be completed in early 1907. Huddleston describes the bridge under construction thus:
“The bridge will consist of nine soane of 150 ft., and there will be a roadway under the rails; the bridge is being built for a single line, and all the wells have been sunk to a depth of 60 ft , or more. The work … commenced in September [1905], and it is expected that the bridge will be completed in March 1907. It need only be added that the site selected for this new connection is between the existing railway bridge and the floating pontoon road bridge, and the chief point of the scheme is that, when carried out, the East Indian Railway will have a line through the city of Agra, and a terminus for its goods traffic in a most central position, instead of being handicapped, as it now is, by having its goods depôt on the wrong side of the river. Mr. A. H. Johnstone is the East Indian Railway engineer-in-charge of the work.” [1: p43]
We start the journey along this short branch in the 21st century at Tundla Junction Railway Station.
Tundla Railway Station. [Google Earth, October 2024]Tundla Railway Station (c) Amit Kumar (2023)Tundla Railway Station (c) Bikram Dhara (2022)
We head Northwest out of the station alongside the main line to Delhi.
Looking West towards Tundla Junction Railway Station from the South side of the lines. The closest rail line is the branch to Agra. [Google Streetview, July 2023]
The first station along the branch was Etmadpur Railway Station.
Etmadpur Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Etmadpur Railway Station, (c) Harkesh Yadav, March 2021. [Google Maps, October 2024]
The line to Agra next passes under the very modern loop line which allows trains to avoid Tundla Station.
Looking West, back towards Etmadpur Station under the modern relieving line bridge. [Google Streetview, June 2023]
The next photograph shows the older single track metal girder bridge a little further to the West of Etmadpur with the more modern second line carried by a reinforced concrete viaduct.
Seen from the North side of the line looking South, the older single track metal girder bridge with the more modern second line carried by a reinforced concrete viaduct. [Google Streetview, June 2023]
The line curves round from travelling in an West-northwest direction to a West-southwest alignment and then enters the next station on the line, Kuberpur Railway Station.
Kuberpur Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Kuberpur Railway Station seen from the approach road to the North. [Google Streetview, June 2023]Kuberpur Railway Station building seen from the platform, (c) sanjeev kumar, May 2018. [Google Maps, October 2024]A low definition view of the line heading West towards Agra as seen from the modern concrete viaduct carrying what I believe to be Agra’s Ring Road (a toll road). [Google Streetview, June 2023]
As we head into Agra, the next station is Chhalesar Railway Station.
Chhalesar Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Chhalesar Railway Station (c) Sabha Shankar, June 2018.Chhalesar Railway Station (c) Rohit Jaiswal, August 2023.
From Chhalesar Railway Station the line continues in a West-southwest direction towards the centre of Agra. The next station is Yamuna Bridge Railway Station.
Yamuna Bridge Railway Station Agra. [Google Maps, October 2024]Yamuna Bridge Railway Station, Agra, (c) Ashish Yadav, February 2022.Yamuna Bridge Railway Station, Agra, (c) Hasharema International Private Limited, September 2024.
South West of Yamuna Bridge Railway Station a series of bridges cross the River Yamuna.
Bridges across the River Yamuna. [Google Maps, October 2024]
The ‘Yamuna Railway Bridge’ crossing the River Jumna/Yamuna at Agra was opened in 1875, and connected ‘Agra East Bank Station’ to ‘Agra Fort Station’. The bridge carried the Bombay, Baroda and Central India Railway (BB&CIR) Metre Gauge ‘Agra-Bandikui Branch Line’, the East Indian Railway (EIR) and ‘Great Indian Peninsula Railway (GIPR) Broad Gauge lines. [18]
The first bridge over the Yamuna River at Agra. It is the more southerly of the two bridges shown on the 1972 map of Agra below. [17]A map of Agra in 1962 which shows the two Yamuna River Bridges in place by then. Some of the significant features of the city can be identified clearly on this map: Agra Fort and its adjacent railway station appear close to the first Yamuna Bridge; the Taj Mahal is to the South East of the bridge on the South bank of the river; the Tomb of Itmad-ud-Daulah can be seen to the East of the river just North of the Strachey Bridge; a number of railway stations can also be picked out around Agra City. [20]
The ‘Strachey Bridge’, to the North the older bridge at Agra, was opened in 1908. It was a combined Road and Railway bridge and constructed by the ‘East Indian Railway Company’ (EIR). The bridge was named after John Strachey who planned & designed the bridge. The 1,024 metres (3,360 ft) long bridge was completed in 1908, taking 10 years to complete since its construction commenced in 1898. The ‘Agra City Railway Station’ was thus connected by the bridge to the ‘Jumna Bridge Station’ on the East bank. This Broad Gauge line became the ‘EIR Agra Branch Line’. [18]
The Strachey Railway bridge over the Yamuna River, The two-tiered bridge facilitated simultaneous movement of road traffic at the bottom level and rail transport at the upper level. Though the bridge is still in use today, it’s closed for road traffic and is used only by railways. This bridge appears on the satellite image above, on the South side of the Ambedkar Road Bridge. [19]
Once the Strachey Bridge (this is the one about which Huddleston speaks at length above) was opened in 1908. The EIR had access to the heart of the city and particularly to Agra City Station. We will look at City Station a few paragraphs below. But it is worth completing a look at the bridges over the Yamuna River with the bridge which replaced the first Yamuna River railway bridge.
Huddleston comments: “Delhi is one of the most important junctions on the East Indian Railway. The Rajputana Malwa, the North Western, Southern Punjab, Oudh and Rohilkhand and Great Indian Peninsular Railways all run into Delhi. There is a regular network of lines in and around, and the main passenger station is that belonging to the East Indian Railway. All the railways run their passenger trains into the East Indian Railway station, and most of the goods traffic passes through it also. For some years past Delhi has been in a state of remodelling; the work is still going on, and it will be some time before it is completed.” [1: p43]
He continues: “When you alight on one of the numerous platforms at Delhi station, there is a feeling of elbow room; the whole station seems to have been laid out in a sensible way. You are able to move without fear of being jostled over the platform edge, everything looks capacious, and especially the two great waiting halls, which flank either side of the main station building. These are, perhaps, the two finest waiting halls in India; passengers congregate there, and find every convenience at hand, the booking office, where they take their tickets, vendors’ stalls, where they get various kinds of refreshments, a good supply of water, and, just outside, places in which to bathe; a bath to a native passenger is one of the greatest luxuries, and he never fails to take one when opportunity offers.” [1: p44]
Wikipedia tells us that “Delhi Junction railway station is the oldest railway station in Old Delhi. … It is one of the busiest railway stations in India in terms of frequency. Around 250 trains start, end, or pass through the station daily. It was established near Chandni Chowk in 1864 when trains from Howrah, Calcutta started operating up to Delhi. Its present building was constructed by the British Indian government in the style of the nearby Red Fort and opened in 1903. It has been an important railway station of the country and preceded the New Delhi by about 60 years. Chandni Chowk station of the Delhi Metro is located near it.” [21]
Delhi junction Railway Station was the main railway station in Delhi at the time that Huddleston was writing his articles.
Delhi Junction Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Delhi Junction Railway Station as it appears on OpenStreetMap. [21]Delhi Junction Railway Station. [22]The Red Fort, Delhi (c) M F Music. (2023)Jama Masjid, Delhi (c) Md Asif. (2022)New Delhi Railway Station is marked on this OpenStreetMap extract with a blue flag, it is just a short distance Southwest of Delhi Junction Railway Station which is marked by a grey train symbol to the top-right of the map extract and named ‘Old Delhi’. [23]
Delhi, Ambala (Umbala) and Kalka
The East Indian Railway proper terminated at Delhi Junction Railway Station but the railway company also operated the independently owned Delhi-Umabala-Kalka Railway.
“A railway line from Delhi to Kalka via Ambala was constructed by the Delhi Umbala Kalka Railway Company (DUK) during 1889 and 1890 and operations were commenced on March 1, 1891. The management of the line was entrusted to the East Indian Railway Company (EIR) who were able to register a net profit in the very first year of operation. The Government of India purchased the line in 1926 and transferred the management to the state controlled North Western Railway. After partition, this section became part of the newly formed East Punjab Railway and was amalgamated with the Northern Railway on 14th April 1952.” [3]
The terminus of this line is at Kalka, 162 miles from Delhi. Huddleston tells us that, “In the beginning of the hot weather, when the plains are becoming unbearable, Kalka station is thronged with those fortunates who are going to spend summer in the cool of the Himalayas, and, when the hot weather is over, Kalka is crowded with the same people returning to the delights of the cold season, very satisfied with themselves at having escaped a grilling in the plains. Therefore, nearly everyone who passes Kalka looks cheerful, but, of course, there is the usual exception to the rule; and in this case the exception is a marked one. All the year round there is to be seen at Kalka station a face or two looking quite the reverse of happy, and, if we search the cause, we find it soon enough. The sad faces belong to those who have reached Kalka on their way to the Pasteur Institute, at Kasauli; Kasauli is in the hills some ten miles from Kalka. It is at Kasauli that Lord Curzon, when Viceroy, established that incalculable boon to all the people of India, a Pasteur Institute. Formerly, when anyone was bitten by a mad dog, or by a mad jackal, and such animals are fairly common in the East, he had to fly to Paris, and spend anxious weeks before he could be treated-some, indeed, developed hydrophobia before they could get there, or got there too late to be treated with any hope of success. Now, instead of going to Paris, they go to Kasauli.” [1: p44-45]
The western approach to Deli Junction Railway Station. The station is on the right of this satellite image. The lines to the New Delhi Railway Station leave the image to the South, to the left of centre. The line to Kalka leaves the image towards the top-left. [Google Maps, October 2024]The view West from the bridge carrying Pul Mithai over the railway. The lines entering the photograph from the left are those from New Delhi Railway Station. Those ahead begin the journey to Kalka. [Google Streetview, February 2022]Looking West from Rani Jhansi Road/Flyover. It may be difficult to make out, but the line to Kalka curves away to the right. [Google Streetview, February 2022]
The first station beyond the junction shown in the photograph above is Sabzi Mandi Railway Station.
Heading North-northwest out of Delhi, trains pass through Delhi Azadpur Railway Station, under Mahatma Gandhi Road (the Ring Road), on through Adarsh Nagar Delhi Railway Station and under the Outer Ring Road.
Looking North-northwest from Mahata Gandhi Road. [Google Streetview, April 2022]Looking North-northwest from the Outer Ring Road. [Google Streetview, April 2022]
Outside of the Outer Ring Road the line passes through Samaypur Badli Railway Station which is an interchange station for the Metro; across a level-crossing on Sirsapur Metro Station Road; through Khera Kalan Railway Station and out of the Delhi conurbation.
Looking North-northwest from Sirsapur Metro Station Road Level-Crossing. [Google Streetview, April 2022]
The line runs on through a series of level-crossings and various stations (Holambi Kolan, Narela, Rathdhana, Harsana Kalan) and under and over modern highways before arriving at Sonipat Junction Railway Station.
A typical view from another level-crossing looking North-northwest along the line.[Google Streetview, April 2022]
Sonipat Junction Railway Station provides connections to Gohana, Jind and Palwal. [24]
(c) Mohit, March 2022. (c) Arvind, August 2021.(c) Rahul Singh, February 2019.
Northwest of Sonipat Railway Station a single-track line diverges to the West as we continue northwards through Sandal Kalan, Rajlu Garhi (North of which a line diverges to the East), Ganaur, Bhodwal Majri, Samalkha, Diwana Railway Stations before arriving at Panipat Junction Railway Station.
Panipat Junction Railway Station was opened in 1891. It has links to the Delhi–Kalka line, Delhi–Amritsar line, Delhi–Jammu line, Panipat–Jind line, Panipat–Rohtak line connected and upcoming purposed Panipat–Meerut line via Muzaffarnagar, Panipat–Haridwar line, Panipat-Rewari double line, via Asthal Bohar, Jhajjar or Bypass by the Rohtak Junction Panipat-Assoti Double line via Farukh Nagar, Patli, Manesar, Palwal. 118 trains halt here each day with a footfall of 40,000 persons per day. [25]
(c) Pintoo Yadav, May 2021.(c) Sunil j, January 2023.
Just to the North of Panipat Junction Railway Station a double-track line curves away to the West. Our journey continues due North parallel to the Jammu-Delhi Toll Road.
A view North along the line from one of the access roads to the Jammu-Delhi Toll Road. [Google Streetview, June 2023]
North of Panipat the line passed through Babarpur, Kohand, Gharaunda, Bazida Jatan Railway Stations while drifting gradually away from the Jammu-Delhi Toll Road.
Kohand Railway Station (c) Vikas Haryana (2012)Gharaunda Railway Station (c) Rohan Khodlyan (2021)
Beyond Bazida Jatan Station, the line turns from a northerly course to a more northwesterly direction before swinging back Northeast to a more northerly route. It then passes through Karnal Railway Station before once again swinging away to the Northwest and crossing a significant irrigation canal, passing through Bhaini Khurd, Nilokheri, Amin Railway Stations and then arrives at Kurukshetra Junction Railway Station.
North of Kurukshetra Junction the line passes through Dhoda Kheri, Dhirpur, Dhola Mazra, Shahbad Markanda (by this time running very close to the Jammu-Delhi Toll Road again), and Mohri Railway Stations before it bridges the Tangri River.
The Tangri River Railway Bridge seen from NH44, the Jammu-Delhi Road. The photograph is taking facing Northwest. [Google Streetview, June 2023]
Not too far North of the Tangri River the line enters Ambala City and arrives at Ambala Cantt Junction Railway Station.
Ambala Cantt Junction Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Ambala Cantt Junction Railway Station (c) Charan Singh (2021)Ambala Cantt Junction Railway Station (c) Ashish Jha (2022)
Ambala (known as Umbala in the past – this spelling was used by Rudyard Kipling in his 1901 novel Kim) is “located 200 km (124 mi) to the north of New Delhi, India’s capital, and has been identified as a counter-magnet city for the National Capital Region to develop as an alternative center of growth to Delhi.” [26] As of the 2011 India census, Ambala had a population of 207,934.
Travelling further North towards Kalka, trains start heading Northwest out of Ambala Cantt Railway Station. and pass through Dhulkot, Lalru, Dappar, Ghagghar Rauilway Stations before crossing the Ghaggar River and running on into Chandigarh.
The Ghaggar River Railway Bridge seen from the Ghaggar Causeway to the Northeast of the railway Bridge. [Google Streetview, June 2022]
Chandigarh Junction Railway Station sits between Chandigarh and Panchkula. it is illustrated below.
North of Chadigarh the flat plains of India give way to the first foothills of the Himalayas. What has up to this point been a line with very few curves, changes to follow a route which best copes with the contours of the land. Within the city limits of Chandigarh, the line curves sharply to the East, then to the Southeast as illustrated below.
The route of the railway between Chandigarh and Kalka to the immediate North of Chandigarh Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]
The line then sweeps round to the Northeast.
The route of the line is again marked by the thick blue line on this next extract from Google’s satellite imagery. [Google Maps, October 2024]It is possible to glimpse the line from the Chandigarh-Kalka Road (NH5) at various points. This image looks from the road into Chandimandir Military Station. The bridge over the access road which can be seen above the gates carries the line to Kalka. [Google Streetview, June 2022]
The next railway station is that serving the military base, Chandi Mandir Railway Station. The line continues to the Northeast, then the North and then the Northwest before running into Surajpur Railway Station.
A glimpse of the railway North of Surajpur. The camera is facing West across the railway which is on a low metal viaduct. Kalka is some significant distance away off the right of this photograph. [Google Streetview, June 2023]
The line continues to sweep round to the Northeast before crossing the Jhajra Nadi River.
The Jhajra Nadi River Bridge seen from the Southeast on Jhajra Nadi Road. [Google Streetview, June 2023]
The line then runs parallel to the Jhajra Nadi River in a Northeasterly direction on its North bank before swinging round to the Northwest and entering Kalka Railway Station.
Kalka Station. [1: p40]An East Indian Railway Mail Train leaving Kalka. [1: p43]Kalka Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Kalka Railway Station as illustrated on the IndiaRailInfo.com website, (c) Shubh Mohan Singh. The train on the right is, I believe, the ‘Himalayan Queen’.Kalka Railway Station, (c) Saumen Pal (2022)The end of the broad gauge at Kalka Railway Station, (c) Janet Hartzenberg (2022)
The broad gauge terminates at Kalka and the journey on into the Himalayas is by narrow-gauge train.
Kalka to Shimla
Huddleston comments: “Simla [sic] is full of hill schools, and Kalka often sees parties of happy children returning to their homes; a common enough sight in London, perhaps, but in India quite the reverse. In India, European school children only come home for one vacation in the year, and that, of course, is in the cold season when they get all their holidays at a stretch. Many of them have to journey over a thousand miles between home and school. Needless to say, the railway is liberal in the concessions it grants, and does all it can to assist parents in sending their children away from the deadly climate of the plains. … At Kalka you change into a 2 ft. 6 in. hill railway, which takes you to Simla, the summer headquarters of Government, in seven hours. If you are going up in the summer, don’t forget to take thick clothes and wraps with you, for every mile carries you from the scorching heat of the plains into the delightful cool of the Himalayas, and you will surely need a change before you get to the end of your journey. … Kalka is 2,000 ft. above sea level, Simla more than 7,000 ft., therefore, the rise in the 59 miles of hill railway is over 5,000 ft., and the fall in the temperature probably 30 degrees Fahrenheit.” [1: p45]
Train of Bogie Coaches about to leave Kalka for Shimla. [1: p44]A portion of the sinuous course of the Kalka-Shimla line’s climb into the Himalayas. [1: p45]
The plan is to try to follow the line of the railway as it climbs away from Kalka Railway Station. First a quick look at the narrow gauge end of Kalka Railway Station.
The North end of Kalka Railway Station is devoted to the narrow-gauge line to Shimla. [Google Maps, October 2024]The narrow-gauge platforms at Kalka Railway Station seen from the Northwest. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The Kalka-Shimla Line. Kalka station throat looking Southeast into the station complex. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
The two views above were taken from the rear of a Shimla-bound train. This will be true of many subsequent photographs of the line.
Looking back towards Kalka Station from alongside the Diesel Shed. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The Kalka-Shimla line winds its way through Kalka. [Google Maps, October 2024]The line continues to switch back and forth on its way to the first station at Taksal. [Google Maps, October 2024]Taksal Railway Station. [Google Maps, October 2024]Taksal Railway Station looking West. [Google Streetview, November 2017]Taksal Railway Station looking East. [Google Streetview, November 2017]From Taksal Railway Station the line continues to wander around following the contours, gaining height as it does so. The route can relatively easily be picked out on this satellite image. One length of tunnel has been highlighted in red. [Google Maps, October 2024]The Western Portal of the tunnel marked above. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The Eastern Portal of the tunnel marked above. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The line continues towards Shimla following the contours and continuing to rise into the hills. Its course runs relatively close to National Highway No. 5 (NH5)
Koti Railway Station and tunnel portal just at the northern limits of the station. [Google Maps, October 2024]
Train arriving at Koti from Kalka (c) Meghamalhar Saha. (May 2024)The tunnel portal at Koti (c) Divyansh Sharma. (April 2021)
Koti Tunnel (Tunnel No. 10) is 750 metres in length. Trains for Shimla disappear into it at the station limits at Koti and emerge adjacent to the NH5 road as shown below.
Koti Tunnel (Tunnel No. 10). [Google Maps, October 2024]The Northeast portal of Tunnel No. 10(Koti Tunnel). [Google Streetview, January 2018]Leaving the tunnel the line runs on the West side of the Kalka-Shimla Road (NH5). It can be seen here a couploe of metres higher than the road. [Google Streetview, June 2023]
For some distance the line then runs relatively close to the NH5. on its Northwest side and increasingly higher than the road. The central image below shows road and rail relatively close to each other. The left image shows the structure highlighted in the central image as it appears from the South. The right-hand image shows the same structure from the North. The structure highlighted here is typical of a number along the route of the railway.
For a short distance the line has to deviate away from the road to maintain a steady grade as it crosses a side-valley.
The line runs away North of the NH5 to allow gradients to remain steady. Top0-left of this image is a wayside halt serving the communities in this vicinity and as the line turns to cross the valley and return towards the NH5, there is a bridge carrying the line over the valley floor. [Google Streetview, October 2024]
The Halt and bridge shown in the image above on an enlarged extract from the satellite imagery. [Google Maps, October 2024]
The Halt. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The stone-arched viaduct to the Northeast of the Halt, seen from the platform. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
Tunnel No. 12 is only a short tunnel relatively close to the NH5. This is the West portal. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The East Portal of Tunnel No. 12. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Tunnel No. 13. [Google Maps, October 2024]Tunnel No. 14. [Google Maps, October 2024]
The sort tunnels above are typical of a number along the line. Tunnel No. 16 takes the railway under the NH5.
The NH5 climbs alongside the railway line which can be seen on the left of this image. around 100 metres further along the line Tunnel No. 16 takes the railway under the road. [Google Streetview, August 2024]The line crosses under the NH5 at the bottom left of this satellite image and can be seen following the contours on the Southside of the road across the full width of the image, leaving the photo in the top-right corner. [Google Maps, October 2024]Looking back down the line towards Kalka through Sonwara Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Again looking back towards Kalka the structure that the train has just crossed is given its own sign board. It appears to be a 4 span stone-arched viaduct. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
The next tunnel on the line (No. 18) is a semi-circular tunnel.
Tunnel No. 18The first portal , facing Southwest, encountered by Shimla-bound trains.The exit portal also facing Southwest.
Tunnels No. 21 and No. 22 are shown below. The first image in each of these cases is the line superimposed on Google Maps satellite imagery (October 2024). The other two images, in each case, are from Google Streetview, January 2018.
Immediately beyond the station the line is bridged by the NH5 and then enters another tunnel.
The short tunnel to the North of Dharampur Himachal Railway Station which perhaps carried the original road, (c) Balasubramaniam Janardhanan. (Video still, April 2022) {Google Maps, October 2024]The same bridge and short tunnel. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The line running North beyond the tunnel. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
After a deviation away to the North, the railway returns to the side of the NH5. Tunnels No. 27 and 28 take the line under small villages. Another tunnel (No. 29) sits just before Kumarhatti Dagshai Railway Station.
Kumarhatti Dagshai Railway Station. [Google Maps, November 2024]Kumarhatti Dagshai Railway Station, (c) Faizan Ahmed. (2020)Kumarhatti Dagshai Railway Station, (c) Bhushan Saini. (2023)Kumarhatti Dagshai Railway Station building. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
As trains leave Kumarhatti Dagshai Railway Station, heading for Shimla, they immediately enter Tunnel No. 30.
Tunnel No. 30 is a short straight tunnel which takes the railway under the village and NH5. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
Two short tunnels follow in quick succession, various tall retaining walls are passed as well before the line crosses a relatively shallow side-valley by means of a masonry arched viaduct.
A short viaduct to the East of Kumarhatti Dagshai Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
Tunnel No. 33 (Barog Tunnel) is a longer tunnel which runs Southwest to Northeast and brings trains to Barog Railway Station.
Barog Tunnel, Southwest Portal. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Barog Tunnel Northeast portal opens out onto Barog Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Barog Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
Now back on the North side of the NH5, the line continues to rise gently as it follows the contours of the hillside. Five further short tunnels are encountered beyond Barog (Nos. 34, 35, 36, 37 and 38) before the line runs into Solan Railway Station.
Solan Railway Station. [Google Maps, November 2024]A railcar at Solan Station, (c) N Nozawa. (2023)Solan Railway Station, (c) Vikas Chauhan. (2021)
Immediately to the Eat of Solan Railway Station trains enter Tunnel No. 39 and soon thereafter Tunnels Nos. 40, 41 and 42 before crossing the NH5 at a level-crossing.
Level-crossing on the main Kalka-Shimla Road. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
Further tunnels follow on the way to Salogra Railway Station.
Salogra Railway Station was oriented North-South approximately.
Looking North through Salogra Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Salogra Railway Station buildings seen from the South. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Salogra Railway Station sign, (c) Travel More. (2015)
A further series of relative short tunnels protects the line as it runs on the Kandaghat Railway Station.
Tunnel No. 51, typical of many short tunnels on the line. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Approaching Kandaghat Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Kandaghat Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The stone-arched viaduct carrying the line over the NH5 (Kalka-Shimla Road) at the North end of Kandaghat Railway Station. [Google Streetview, July 2024]
Tunnels Nos. 56 and 57 sit a short distance to the East of the viaduct above. the line now accompanies a different highway which turns off the NH5 close to the viaduct.
The next significant structure is the galleried arch bridge below.
More tunnels, Nos. 58 to 66 are passed before the line crosses another significant structure – Bridge No. 541 – and then runs through Kanoh Railway Station.
Bridge No. 541 seen from the aine approaching it from the South. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Bridge No. 541 seen from its West end. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Kanoh Railway Station. [Google Maps, November 2024]Kanoh Railway Station, (c) Saumen Pal. (April 2022). [Google Maps, November 2024]
After Kanoh Station the line passes through a further series of short tunnels (Nos. 67-75) before meeting its old friend the NH5 (the Kalka to Shimla Road) again.
The Kalka to Shimla Railway line viaduct seen from the Southwest on the adjacent NH5 (Kalka-Shimla Road). [Google Streetview, July 2024]
Beyond this point the line passed through Tunnels Nos. 76 and 77 before arriving at Kathleeghat Railway Station.
Kathleeghat Railway Station.
Kathleeghat Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Kathleeghat Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Kathleeghat Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
Immediately the Northeast of Kathleeghat Station the line enters Tunnel No. 78 under the Kalka-Shima Road (NH5) and soon heads away from the road plotting its own course forward toward Shimla through Tunnels Nos. 79 and 80, before again passing under the NH5 (Tunnel No. 81). Tunnels Nos 82 to84 follow and the occasional overbridge before the next stop at Shoghi Railway Station.
Shoghi Railway Station. [Google Maps, November 2024]Shoghi Railway Station, (c) Muhammed Riyas. (2022)Shoghi Railway Station, (c) Abhishek Dhiman. (2020)
North East of Shoghi Station the line turns away from the NH5 and passing though a series of short Tunnels (Nos. 85-90) finds it own way higher into the hills before passing through Scout Halt and into a longer Tunnel (No. 91).
Tunnel No. 91, seen from the track alongside Scout Halt, (c) Iqbal Singh. (2019)Scout Halt, seen from the South Portal of Tunnel No. 91. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The North Portal of Tunnel No.91. [Google Streetview, December 2017]
North of Tunnel No. 91, the line enters Taradevi Railway Station which sits alongside the NH5.
Immediately North of the station the line passes under the NH5 in Tunnel No. 92 and then runs on the hillside to the West of the road. It turns West away from the road and passes through Tunnels 93 to 98 before entering Jutogh Railway Station.
Jutogh Railway Station. [Google Maps, November 2024]Jutogh Railway Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Jutogh Railway Station, (c). Manoj Rai. (2022)
Leaving Jutogh Railway Station, the line turns immediately through 180 degrees and runs along the North side of the ridge on which the town sits. Tunnel No. 98 is followed by a short viaduct.
This viaduct sits just east of Tunnel No. 98, above the Shima-Ghumarwin Road. Just a short distance towards Shima, the same road climbs steeply over the railway which passes under it in Tunnel No. 99. [Google Streetview, January 2018]
east of the road, Tunnel No. 100 is followed by a long run before an overbridge leads into Summer Hill Station.
Summer Hill Railway Station looking back towards Jutogh Station. [Google Streetvoew, December 2017]Summer Hill Railway Station looking towards Shimla. [Google Streetvoew, December 2017]
Beyond Summer Hill Station, the line immediately ducks into Tunnel No. 101 which takes it under the ridge on which Summer Hill sits and then returns almost parallel to the line whch approached Summer Hill Station but to the East of the ridge. It runs on through Tunnel No. 102 to Inverarm Tunnel (No. 103) which brings the line into Shimla.
Inverarm Tunnel (No. 103) Western Portal. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Inverarm Tunnel (No. 103) Sotheast Portal. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The incline on the approach to Shimla Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]The incline on the approach to Shimla Station. [Google Streetview, January 2018]Shimla Railway Station. [Gpgle Streetview, January 2018]Shimla Railway Station. [Google Maps, November 2024]Shimla Railway Station, (c) Agrim Maurya. (2022)Shimla Railway Station, (c) Shishu Ranjan. (2022)
Shimla is the end of this journey on first the East Indian Railway and its branches and then the line to Kalka before we travelled the narrow gauge Kalka to Shimla Line.
Wikipedia tells us that “the Kalka–Shimla Railway is a 2 ft 6 in (762 mm) narrow-gauge railway. … It is known for dramatic views of the hills and surrounding villages. The railway was built under the direction of Herbert Septimus Harington between 1898 and 1903 to connect Shimla, the summer capital of India during the British Raj, with the rest of the Indian rail system. … Its early locomotives were manufactured by Sharp, Stewart and Company. Larger locomotives were introduced, which were manufactured by the Hunslet Engine Company. Diesel and diesel-hydraulic locomotives began operation in 1955 and 1970, respectively. On 8 July 2008, UNESCO added the Kalka–Shimla Railway to the mountain railways of India World Heritage Site.” [28]
References
G. Huddleston; The East Indian Railway; in The Railway Magazine, July 1906, p40-45.
The June 1922 issue of The Railway Magazine celebrated its Silver Jubilee with a number of articles making comparisons between the railway scene in 1897 and that of 1922 or thereabouts.
In celebrating its Silver Jubilee, The Railway Magazine was also offering, in its June 1922 edition, its 300th number.
Reading through the various celebratory articles, a common theme encountered was statistical comparisons between 1897 and 1922.
This started in the first few words of J.F. Gairns article, Twenty-five Years of Railway Progress and Development: [1]
“Railway mileage in 1897 was officially given as 21,433 miles for the British Isles, of which 11,732 miles were double track or more. In the course of the past 25 years the total length of railway (officially stated as 23,734 miles according to the latest returns available) has increased by 2,300 miles, and double track or more is provided on no less than 13,429 miles. Detailed figures as to the mileage laid with more than two lines in 1897 cannot be given; but there are now about 2,000 miles with from three to 12 or more lines abreast. Therefore, while the total route mileage increase is not so great indeed, it could not be, seeing that all the trunk lines and main routes except the Great Central London extension were completed long before 1897, and additions are therefore short or of medium length – there has been a very large proportionate increase in multiple track mileage. As the extent to which multiple track is provided is an important indication of traffic increase, this aspect calls for due emphasis. … The total paid-up capital of British railways, including in each case nominal additions, has increased from £1,242,241,166 to £1,327,486,097, that is, by some £85,000,000, apart from the cost of new works, etc., paid for out of revenue.” [1: p377]
Gairns went on to highlight newly constructed railways during the period which included:
The London Extension of what became the Great Central Railway in 1899;
The Cardiff Railway at the turn of the 29th century, which “involved a number of heavy engineering works. … Nine skew bridges, five crossing the Merthyr river, three across the Glamorganshire Canal, and one across the River Taff. Near Nantgawr the River Taff [was] diverted. The various cuttings and embankments [were] mostly of an extensive character. Ten retaining walls, 12 under bridges, 10 over bridges, a short tunnel and a viaduct contributed to the difficult nature of the work.” [2]
The Port Talbot Railway and Docks Company, which “opened its main line in 1897 and reached a connection with the Great Western Railway Garw Valley line the following year. A branch line to collieries near Tonmawr also opened in 1898. The lines were extremely steeply graded and operation was difficult and expensive, but the company was successful.” [3]
The London Underground, which had its origins in “the Metropolitan Railway, opening on 10th January 1863 as the world’s first underground passenger railway. … The first line to operate underground electric traction trains, the City & South London Railway… opened in 1890, … The Waterloo and City Railway opened in 1898, … followed by the Central London Railway in 1900. … The Great Northern and City Railway, which opened in 1904, was built to take main line trains from Finsbury Park to a Moorgate terminus.” [4] Incidentally, by the 21st century, “the system’s 272 stations collectively accommodate up to 5 million passenger journeys a day. In 2023/24 it was used for 1.181 billion passenger journeys.” [4]
Many Light Railways “by which various agricultural and hitherto remote districts have been given valuable transport facilities.” [1: p377]
Brackley Viaduct was one of many heavy engineering works entailed in the construction of the GCR extension to London which opened formally on 15th March 1899. It was built to carry the railway across the Great Ouse and the river’s flood plain, the 22 arch 755 foot viaduct was perhaps the most striking piece of architecture on the London Extension. It was demolished in the late 1970s. [1: p377][10]
Gairns goes on to list significant lines by year of construction:
“In 1897, the Glasgow District Subway (cable traction, the first sections of the Cardiff and Port Talbot Railways, and the Hundred of Manhood and Selsey, and Weston, Cleveland and Portishead Light Railways were brought into use.
In 1898, the Lynton and Barnstaple narrow gauge (1 ft. 11 in.), Waterloo and City (electric tube, now the property of the London and South Western Railway), and North Sunderland light railways, were added.
In 1899, … the completion and opening of the Great Central extension to London, the greatest achievement of the kind in Great Britain in modern times.
In 1900, the Rother Valley Light Railway was opened from Robertsbridge to Tenterden, and the Sheffield District Railway (worked by the Great Central Railway) and the Central London electric railway (Bank to Shepherd’s Bush) were inaugurated. …
In 1901 the Bideford, Westward Ho! and Appledore (closed during the war and not yet reopened), Sheppey Light (worked by South Eastern and Chatham Railway), and Basingstoke and Alton (a “light” line worked by the London and South Western Railway, closed during the war and not yet reopened), were completed.
In 1902, the Crowhurst and Bexhill (worked by the South Eastern and Chatham Railway), Whitechapel and Bow (joint London, Tilbury and Southend – now Midland – and Metropolitan District Railways, electric but at first worked by steam), Dornoch Light (worked by Highland Railway), and Vale of Rheidol narrow gauge (later taken over by the Cambrian Railways) railways were opened.
[In 1903], the Letterkenny and Burtonport Railway (Ireland), 49 miles in length 3 ft. gauge; [the] Llanfair and Welshpool, Light (worked by Cambrian Railways), Lanarkshire and Ayrshire extension (worked by Caledonian Railway), Meon Valley and Axminster and Lyme Regis (worked by London and South Western Railway), Axholme Joint (North Eastern and Lancashire and Yorkshire – now London and North Western Railways), and Wick and Lybster Light (worked by Highland Railway) railways were opened.” [1: p377-378]
A number of the lines listed by Gairns are covered in articles on this blog. Gairns continues:
In 1904, the Tanat Valley Light Railway (worked by the Cambrian Railways), Great Northern and City Electric (now Metropolitan Railway), Leek and Manifold narrow gauge (worked by North Staffordshire Railway but having its own rolling-stock), Kelvedon, Tiptree and Tollesbury Light (worked by Great Eastern Railway), Mid-Suffolk Light and Burtonport Extension Railways were opened.
1905 saw the Cairn Valley Light (worked by Glasgow and South Western Railway), and Dearne Valley (worked by Lancashire and Yorkshire Railway, now London and North Western Railway) railways opened.
1906 includes quite a lengthy list: part of the Baker Street and Waterloo electric (now London Electric), Bankfoot Light (worked by Caledonian Railway), Amesbury and Bulford Light (worked by London and South Western Railway), Burton and Ashby Light (Midland Railway, worked by electric tramcars), Corringham Light, North Lindsey Light (worked by Great Central Railway), Campbeltown and Machrihanish (1 ft. 11 in. gauge), and Great Northern, Piccadilly and Brompton (now London Electric) railways.
In 1907, the Charing Cross, Euston and Hampstead Railway(now London Electric) was added.
In 1908, the Bere Alston and Callington section of the Plymouth, Devonport and South Western Junction Railway, worked with its own rolling-stock, was opened.
In 1909, the Strabane and Letterkenny (3 ft. gauge) Railway in Ireland. Also the Cleobury Mortimer and Ditton Priors Light, Newburgh and North Fife (worked by North British Railway), and part of the Castleblaney, Keady and Armagh Railway (worked by Great Northern Railway, Ireland) in Ireland.
In 1910, the South Yorkshire Joint Committee’s Railway (Great Northern, Great Central, North Eastern, Lancashire and Yorkshire – now London and North Western – and Midland Railways) was opened.
1911 saw passenger traffic inaugurated on the Cardiff Railway, and the Shropshire and Montgomeryshire Light, East Kent, and Mawddwy (worked by Cambrian Railways) lines opened.
In 1912 the Cork City Railway was opened, the Dearne Valley line brought into use for passenger traffic, and a section of the Derwent Valley Light Railway opened.
In 1913 the Elsenham and Thaxted Light Railway (worked by Great Eastern Railway) was opened, and a part of the Mansfield Railway (worked by Great Central Railway) brought into use for mineral traffic.
Then came the war years, which effectively put a stop to much in the way of new railway construction, and the only items which need be mentioned here are: a part of the old Ravenglass and Eskdale, reopened in 1915 as the Eskdale Railway (15 in. gauge), and the Mansfield Railway, brought into use for passenger traffic (1917). The Ealing and Shepherd’s Bush Electric Railway, worked by the Central London Railway, was opened in 1920.
A lengthy list, but including a number of lines which now count for a great deal, particularly in regard to the London electric tube railways, … It must be remembered, too, that except where worked by another company and as noted, most of these lines possess their own locomotives and rolling-stock.” [1: p378-379]
Despite the extent of these new lines, Gairns comments that it is “the extensions of previously existing railways which have had the greatest influence.” [1: p379] It is worth seeing his list in full. It includes:
“In 1897, the Highland Railway extended its Skye line from Stromeferry to Kyle of Lochalsh, and in 1898 the North British Railway completed the East Fife Central lines. 1899 was the historic year for the Great Central Railway, in that its London extension was opened, giving the company a main trunk route and altering many of the traffic arrangements previously in force with other lines. Indeed, the creation of this ‘new competitor’ for London, Leicester, Nottingham, Sheffield, Manchester and, later, Bradford traffic, materially changed the general railway situation in many respects. In the same year, the Highland Railway direct line, from Aviemore to Inverness was opened, this also having a considerable influence upon Highland traffic. In 1900 the London, Brighton and South Coast Railway completed the new ‘Quarry’ lines, giving an independent route from Coulsdon to Earlswood.
In 1901, the Great Western Railway opened the Stert and Westbury line, one of the first stages involved in the policy of providing new and shorter routes, which has so essentially changed the whole character of Great Western Railway train services and traffic operation. In that year, also, the West Highland Railway (now North British Railway) was extended to Mallaig, adding one of the most scenically attractive and constructionally notable lines in the British Isles. The Bickley-Orpington connecting lines of the South Eastern and Chatham Railway, brought into service in 1902, enabled trains of either section to use any of the London termini, and this has essentially changed the main features of many of the train services of the Managing Committee.
In 1903, the Great Western Railway opened the new Badminton lines for Bristol and South Wales traffic, a second stage in the metamorphosis of this system. In 1906 the Fishguard-Rosslare route was completed for Anglo-Irish traffic, while the opening of the Great Central and Great Western joint line via High Wycombe materially altered London traffic for both companies in many respects. The same year saw the completion of connecting links whereby from that time the chief route for London-West of England traffic by the Great Western Railway has been via Westbury instead of via Bristol.
The year 1908 provided still another Great Western innovation, the completion of the Birmingham and West of England route via Stratford-on-Avon and Cheltenham.
In 1909 the London and North Western Railway opened the Wilmslow-Levenshulme line, providing an express route for London-Manchester traffic avoiding Stockport. In that year also the Thornhill connection between the Midland and the then Lancashire and Yorkshire Railway introduced new through facilities.
In 1910 the opening of the Enfield-Cuffley line of the Great Northern Railway provided the first link in a new route for main line traffic to and from London, though this is even yet only partially available, and opened up a new suburban area for development. The same year saw the advent of the Ashenden-Aynho line, by which the Great Western Railway obtained the shortest route from London to Birmingham, with consequent essential changes in the north train services, and the inauguration of the famous two-hour expresses by that route and also by the London and North Western Railway.
In 1912 the latter railway brought into operation part of the Watford lines, paving the way for material changes in traffic methods, and in due course for through working of London Electric trains between the Elephant and Castle and Watford, and for electric traffic to and from Broad Street and very shortly from Euston also. In 1913 part of the Swansea district lines were brought into use by the Great Western Railway, and in 1915 the North British Railway opened the new Lothian lines. [1: p379-380]
Many of the changes over the 25 years were far-reaching in character others were of great local significance, such as station reconstructions, widenings, tunnels, dock/port improvements and new bridges.
New long tunnels included: Sodbury Tunnel on the GWR Badminton line; Ponsbourne Tunnel on the GNR Enfield-Stevenage line; Merstham (Quarry) Tunnel on the LB&SCR ‘Quarry’ line.
Reconstructed/new/enlarged stations included: Victoria (LB&SCR); Glasgow Central (CR); Manchester Victoria (L&YR); Waterloo (L&SWR); Birmingham Snow Hill (GWR); Euston (LNWR); Crewe (LNWR) and Paddington (GWR)
Among a whole range of Capital Works undertaken by the GWR, was the new MPD at Old Oak Common. The LNWR’s new carriage lines outside Euston and the Chalk Farm improvements were significant, as were their system of avoiding lines around Crewe.
The MR takeover of the LT&SR in 1912 and their works between Campbell Road Junction and Barking are noteworthy. The L&SWR undertook major electrification of suburban lines, built a new concentration yard at Feltham, and made extensions and improvements at Southampton.
The LB&SCR’s widenings/reconstructions of stations on the ‘Quarry’ lines, which enabled through trains to run independently of the SE&CR line through Redhill were of importance. As we’re the SE&CR’s works associated with the improvements at Victoria, the new lines around London Bridge, the new Dover Marine Station and changes throughout their system.
The GCR London Extension is equalled in importance by the High Wycombe joint line and the GCR’s construction and opening of Immingham Dock in 1912. Gairns also points out that the NER and the H&BR works associated with the King George Dock in Hull should not be forgotten.
Also of significance were some railway amalgamations and some other events of historic interest between 1897 and 1922. Gairns included:
In 1897, the Manchester, Sheffield and Lincolnshire Railways name changed to ‘Great Central Railway’.
In 1899, the South Eastern and Chatham Joint Committee was set up.
In 1900, the Great Southern & Western Railway took over the Waterford & Central Ireland Railway and absorbed the Waterford, Limerick & Western Railway in 1901.
In 1903, the Midland Railway took over the Belfast & Northern Counties Railway.
In 1905, the Hull, Barnsley & West Riding Junction Railway & Dock Company became the Hull & Barnsley Railway; the Great Central Railway headquarters were moved from Manchester to London.
In 1906 the Harrow-Verney Junction section of the Metropolitan Railway was made joint with the Great Central Railway.
In 1907, the Lancashire, Derbyshire & East Coast Railway was amalgamated with the Great Central Railway; the Dublin, Wicklow & Wexford Railway became the Dublin & South Eastern Railway; and the greater part of the Donegal Railway was taken over jointly by the Great Northern of Ireland and Midland (Northern Counties section) under the County Donegal Railways Joint Committee.
In 1912, the London, Tilbury & Southend Railway was taken over by the Midland Railway.
In 1913, the Great Northern & City Railway was absorbed by the Metropolitan Railway.
Gairns also noted “the now almost universal provision of restaurant cars and corridor carriages of bogie type, Pullman cars upon many lines, and through carriages providing a wide variety of through facilities, culminating in the introduction last year of direct communication without change of vehicle between Penzance, Plymouth and Aberdeen, Southampton and Edinburgh, etc.” [1: p382]
In the period from 1897 to 1922, there had been essential changes to traffic characteristics:
“notably in the abolition of second-class accommodation by all but a very few lines in England and Scotland, though it is still retained generally in Ireland and to some extent in Wales.” [1: p382]
“the generous treatment of the half-day, day and period and long-distance excursionist, who in later years has been given facilities almost equal, in regard to speed and comfort of accommodation, to those associated with ordinary traffic.” [1: p383]
Gairns also provides, in tabular form, comparative statistics which illustrate some remarkable changes over the period from 1827 to 1922. His table compares data from 1897, 1913 and 1920.
Table showing comparative statistics for 1897, 1913 1920 and, in the case of cash receipts and expenditure, 1921. The year of 1913 was probably chosen as it was the last full set of statistics available prior to the start of the first World War. [1: p383]
In commenting on the figures which appear in the table above, Gairns draws attention to: the decline in numbers of second class passengers, the dramatic fall and then rise in the number of annual season tickets; the rise and then fall in tonnages of freight carried by the railways; and the significant increase in turnover without a matching increase in net receipts.
In respect of season tickets, Gairns notes that “whereas in 1897 and 1913 each railway having a share in a fare included the passenger in its returns, in 1920 he was only recorded once. … [and] that in later years the mileage covered by season tickets [had] considerably increased.” [1: p383]
He also comments on the way that in the years prior to the War, local tramways took significant suburban traffic from the railways, whereas, after the War, that traffic seemed to return to the railways.
Gairns also asks his readers to note the limited statistical changes to goods traffic over the period and to appreciate that in the 1920 figures freight movements were only records once rather than predicted to each individual railway company.
In respect of gross receipts and expenditure, he asks his readers to remember that in 1920 the Government control of railways under guarantee conditions was still in place and to accept that, “the altered money values, and largely increased expenditure (and therefore gross receipts) figures vitiate correct comparison, so that the 1897 and 1913 figures are of chief interest as showing the development of railway business.” [1: p383]
‘Articulated’ Sleeping Car, East Coast Joint Stock, designed by H.N. Gresley and built at Doncaster. [1: p382]Two different Pullman Cars. The top image illustrates a First Class car on the SE&CR, the lower image shows a Third Class car on the LBSCR. [1: p384]
Gairns goes on to show rolling-stock totals for 1897 and 1920. …
Steam Loco numbers increased from 19,462 to 25,075; ElectricLoco numbers rose from 17 to 84; Railmotor cars rose from 0 to 134; Coaching vehicles (non-electric) increased from 62,411 to 72,698; Coaching vehicles (electric, motor and trailer) rose from 107 to 3,096; Goods and mineral vehicles rose from 632,330 to 762,271.
A GWR Steam Railmotor and Trailer Car. [1: p385]
“In 1897 the 17 electric locomotives were all on the City and South London Railway, and 44 of the electric motor cars on the Liverpool Overhead, and two on the Bessbrook and Newry line, with the 54 trailer cars on the City and South London, and seven on the Liverpool Overhead.” [1: p383-385]
Gairns notes as well that by 1922 there was a “widespread use of power for railway signalling with its special applications for automatic, semi-automatic and isolated signals.” [1: p385]G
Gairns completes his article with an optimistic look forward to the new railway era and the amalgamations that would take place as a result of the Railways Act, 1921. Changes that would come into effect in 1923.
References
G.F. Gairns; Twenty-five Years of Railway Progress and Development; in The Railway Magazine, London, June 1922, p377-385.
The Cardiff Railway in The Railway Magazine, London, April 1911.
A contemporary account of the completion of the additional rail bridge over the River Tyne.
This is the Bridge that became known as the King Edward VII Bridge. It is a Grade II listed structure and has been described as “Britain’s last great railway bridge”. [4]
The King Edward VII Bridge, Newcastle, (c) Ardfern and licenced for reuse under a Creative Commons Licence (CC BY-SA 3.0). [5]A map of the North-Eastern Railway at Newcastle -on-Tyne. This sketch comes from the article in The Railway Magazine and suffers from a minor problem that left me struggling, for a short while, to make sense of it. Surely Central Station, Newcastle is on the North bank of the Tyne? It was the lack of a North point on the map that left me confused! [1: p9]
The introduction to the article in the Railway Magazine says:
“Travellers journeying by the East Coast route to and from places north of Newcastle-on- Tyne, have always commented on an anachronism of the twentieth century, that hitherto has required trains to run into a ‘dead end’ station, thus compelling a stop, with consequent delay, whatever might be the stress of competition between the rival routes. Now however, all this is to be altered. Readers of The Railway Magazine are acquainted with the fact that for some years past the North-Eastern Railway has had under construction a duplicate high-level bridge across the Tyne, by means of which trains north to south, and vice versa, will be enabled to pass through the Central Station, without stopping, if necessary, but, at all events, without having the direction in which the train is travelling altered. The plan [above shows] how this improvement is effected by means of the new bridge and connecting lines. His Majesty the King has consented to open the new bridge, and thus inaugurate the improvement, on Tuesday, 10th July, after which date it will be possible to work the North-Eastern Railway trains that pass through Newcastle-on-Tyne in a manner showing a considerable improvement in the system now [pertaining]” [1: p9-10]
The New High Level Bridge Carrying the North Eastern Railway across the Tyne at Newcastle. [1: p10]
From the South side of the River Tyne a triangular junction gives access to the bridge, which is described by The Railway Magazine::
“A stone viaduct of three spans forms the approach to the bridge proper, which consists of four girder spans; the first being 191 ft. between piers, the two centre ones each 300 ft., and the northern span 231 ft. between the piers; this is followed by a stone viaduct of 10 spans each 25 ft. wide. The height of the ten piers of this viaduct, from road level to the spring of the arch, is 18 ft., and the arches are semi-circular, the arch stones being 18 in. in depth. The distance from road level to rail level is 33 ft., the foundations being on clay and averaging about 7 ft. in depth. This arching rests on ashlar piers 4 ft. thick and 51 ft. transversely, each pier being relieved by three 7 ft. arches.
The new line is next carried by a bridge across Pottery Lane, and then enters the well-known Forth goods warehouse of the North-Eastern Railway at the first storey level by steel girders resting on brick piers. The spans through the warehouse are 40 ft., and the foundations for the piers are taken down to good clay beneath the cellar floor. The distance from rail to the bottom of the foundation is 40 ft. The roof of the warehouse is held up by a wind screen, resting on the piers outside the parapet girders, and the corner of the building, cut off by the railway, is now being used as offices for the goods staff.
Beyond the goods warehouse the new line continues to a junction with the Newcastle and Carlisle Railway, a short distance west of the Central station at Newcastle.
The new bridge carries four pairs of metals.
The total length of the main bridge, measuring from the first abutment on the north side to the abutment on the south side is 1,150 ft. The girders measure 48 ft. 6 in. from centre to centre of parapets, and the breadth of steel work overall is 50 ft., so that there is thus provided a space of 6 ft. between the tracks, and room for a pathway for the use of platelayers on either side. The girders are built of double lattice work, with top and bottom booms 3 ft. deep, and are braced together at the top and bottom by transoms, of which the lower are of lattice work and the upper of plate work 164 in. deep, the latter carrying the timberway on which the rails run. Each girder has panels of 23 ft., of which the struts or ties are lattice girders 4 ft. 1 1/2 in. wide.
The girders for the centre spans have a camber of 7 1/2 in. and the north span of 6 in. The parapets, which are 5 ft. high are bracketed to the outside of the girders and are of lattice work, and, in order to carry the railway over the piers, the opposite top booms are bracketed out towards each other leaving a space of 6 in. between the ends of the top booms of the girders. To provide for expansion these girders rest on roller bearings at one end of cast steel, with a base of 38 sq. ft. each. The total weight of steel for each of the spans is: North span, 950 tons; two central spans, 3,482 tons; southern span, 1,350 tons. As the rails begin to diverge on the pier in the southern side of the river they are some distance apart at the next pier, there being then 132 ft. between the parapets. For this span of 191 ft. there are also five girders, but they spread out towards the south like a fan instead of being parallel.
The river piers are of Norway granite, and the foundations have all been taken down to the same depth, namely, 69 ft. below high water, and they have been built in caissons. The adoption of the caisson method of constructing the foundations marks a difference between the new high-level and the old bridge, as the latter was built on piled foundations. It should, however, be remembered that in 1845, when Stephenson’s great work was undertaken, the Tyne could almost be forded at low water, whilst there is now a deep-water channel beneath both bridges.
The total length of the new railway is 4 furlongs 2 chains, whilst the loop to the south-east is 1 furlong 2 chains in length. Of this length of railway 19 chains is straight, including the crossing of the river, but the rails are on a 10-chain curve on leaving the west end of the Central station, and again, on a similar curve on reaching the south side of the river, the south-east curve having a radius of 7 chains. The line is level from the commencement on the north side as far as the pier on the south side of the river, when the main curve falls to the south-west on a gradient of 1 in 132, and the loop falls at 1 in 226. The new high-level bridge has been constructed from the designs of Mr. C. A. Harrison, the chief engineer of the Northern Division of the North-Eastern Railway, and this gentleman laid the foundation stone on 29th July 1902, so that less than four years have been occupied in constructing the bridge and new approach railway to Newcastle Central station.” [1: p10-11]
Another view of the King Edward VII Bridge, Newcastle, (c) Nathan Holth, 13th May 2018. [6]
The original ‘High Level Bridge’ – designed by Robert Stephenson
The first High Level Bridge across the Tyne at Newcastle was opened in 1849. It was designed by Robert Stephenson, that bridge carried rail and road traffic and was the first in the world to do so.
Network Rail tells us that “the Newcastle & Berwick Railway secured the Act to build its line in 1845. It stipulated that the company should construct a combined road and rail bridge across the River Tyne between Newcastle and Gateshead, to be completed within four years. … The bridge was designed by Robert Stephenson and detailed drawings were made under the supervision of Thomas E Harrison. To avoid excessive width, and thereby expense, it was decided to carry the railway above, rather than beside, the roadway. The roadway itself was designed to be 20ft (6m) wide with a 6 1/2ft (2m) footway on either side. The combined width allowed three standard gauge tracks to run across the top rail level of the bridge. The overall length of the bridge was to be 1338ft (408m).” [2]
An extract from the contract drawings for Stephenson’s bridge. [2]
Network Rail goes on to describe the construction of the bridge:
“The bridge was a tied arch (or bow-string) bridge with the main structural elements made of either cast or wrought iron. It had in total six spans each 125ft (38m) in length, the cast iron bows supporting the railway while wrought iron ties supported the road deck below. To enable a level line for the railway across the deep and wide Tyne valley, the roadway was built at 96ft (29m) and the railway 120ft (37m) above high water on the river. Contracts for the production of the ironwork were let to local firm Hawkes, Crawshay & Co. of Newcastle.
The bridge sits on five masonry piers, 50ft (15m) thick and 16ft (5m) wide. Although the River Tyne at the point the bridge is constructed was no more than 3ft (1m) deep at low water, its bed consisted of some 30ft (9m) of silt before underlying bedrock could be reached.
A recent invention, the ‘Nasmyth Steam Pile Driver’, was used for the first time in bridge building, enabling the piles for the bridge foundations to be driven down to the bedrock quickly and efficiently. Rush & Lawton of York were contracted to build the five main masonry piers and the land arches on each side carrying the approaches; 50,000 tons of stone was quarried near Newcastle, mainly at Heddon on the Wall.
To assist in the construction work a wooden viaduct was built immediately to the east of the permanent one. This temporary structure was opened to railway traffic on 29 August 1848, just a year before the High Level Bridge itself was opened by Queen Victoria on 28 September 1849. The public roadway over the bridge was not completed and opened until some six months later.” [2]
A Gallery of photos, drawings and engravings of Stephenson’s High Level Bridge. …..
A coloured early engraving looking downstream (1863). [3]An engraving showing the roadway under the rail bridge in early days. [3]Three lines crossed the bridge. This is a view from the South side of the Tyne at high level. [3]A similar image but this time showing more of the West face of the structure. [3]An aerial view of the High Level Bridge in 1967. [3]The entrance to the road bridge in more modern times, after weight and width restrictions were imposed. [3]A view of the High Level Bridge from the Southeast in 2012, looking upstream. [3]A view of the High Level Bridge in 2014 from the Northwest. [3]A modern DMU (A Class 185 diesel multiple unit) crossing the High Level Bridge in 2015. [3]
References
The New High Level Bridge at Newcastle-on-Tyne; in The Railway Magazine, London, July 1906, p9-11.
An unattributed article about these LNWR units was carried in the August 1922 issue of The Railway Magazine. From 6th February 1922 a ‘reversible’ or ‘push-and-pull’ train was in use for working locally between Manchester (Victoria) and Atherton.
Courtesy of Mr. Ashton Davies, M.Β.Ε., General Superintendent (Northern Division) of the LNWR, The Railway Magazine was able to illustrate and describe the equipment of the train employed:
“The train normally consists of a tank engine adapted to run with two bogie coaches, but can be increased to four or six coaches when the volume of traffic calls for further accommodation. The vehicles adapted for use in this way are arranged in pairs, providing nine third-class compartments in one vehicle, seating 108 passengers, while the composite carriage has two first-class and four third-class compartments seating 64 passengers, together with luggage and driver’s compartments. There is thus total accommodation for 172 passengers for each unit pair of vehicles. The length over buffers of each coach is 57 ft. 7 in. and the width over the body is 9 ft. The engine is a 2-4-2 radial tank, the diameter of the coupled wheels being 5 ft. 8 in. and of the radial wheels 3 ft. 7 in. Cylinders are 17.5 in. diam. and 26 in. stroke: boiler pressure is 180 lb. per square inch; length over buffers, 37 ft. 2 in. When the train is made up to six coaches the total length over buffers is 382 ft. 8 in. In one direction the engine is operated as with an ordinary steam train, but in the other direction the driver operates the engine from the driver’s compartment at the rear end of the train.” [1: p128]
A General View of a Two-Coach Train ‘Unit’ with the Driver’s Control Compartment Leading. [1: p128]
The locomotives used on the push-pull services in the old Lancashire and Yorkshire Railway area of the then very new combined company were Webb’s 2-4-2T locos. [4]
The LNWR 4ft 6in Tank was a class of 220 passenger 2-4-2T locomotives manufactured by the London and North Western Railway in their Crewe Works between 1879 and 1898. The ‘4ft 6in’ refers to the diameter of the driving wheels. “The design was an extension of the earlier 2234 2-4-0T built from 1876 which became known as ‘Chopper Tanks’. They had been designed for working local passenger trains. From 1909 many locomotives of the class were fitted for Push-Pull working, giving the nickname of ‘Motor Tanks’. … Withdrawals started in 1905: 118 were scrapped in the years up to 1923 grouping, leaving 90 to be passed to the London, Midland and Scottish Railway. They were allocated power class 1P, and assigned the numbers 6515–6600 and 6758–6761; although only 37 survived long enough to receive them: withdrawals restarted in 1924, and when the last was withdrawn in June 1936, the class became extinct. None were preserved.” [5]
The 2-4-2T engines were not the only locos adapted by the LNWR for push-pull working. From 1914 onwards some of the LNWR Webb ‘Coal Tanks’ “were fitted with push-pull ‘motor train’ equipment with the first so equipped being 576 and 597 which were then deployed on the Brynmawr to Ebbw Vale service. The system used by the LNWR involved the use of mechanical rods and linkages which ran beneath the axles of the locomotives. By 1921, the company was operating 30 branches by this method with many being worked by ‘Coal Tanks’. As a result, 55 locomotives had been equipped with the necessary equipment.” [2]
Webb built his class of 500 0-6-0 coal locomotives between 1873 and 1892 for slow freight work. Between 1881 and 1897 he built 300 0-6-2Ts which were tank engine versions of his of the 58320 class. These tank engines became known as ‘Coal Tanks’. “They had the same cheaply produced cast iron wheels and H-section spokes as the tender engines. A trailing radial truck supporting the bunker was added also with two similarly cast iron wheels. … They were almost entirely built of Crewe standard parts, including the radial rear axle. … Most were relieved of freight duties when the extent of their appalling brakes (initially made of wood) were uncovered, and some were fitted for motor train working.” [3]
The Interior of the 2-4-2T Locomotive Cab, Showing Regulator Fittings, Steam-Driven Air Compressor, etc. [1: p129]
The Railway Magazine article continues:
“The engine and train are fitted with the automatic vacuum brake. A compressed-air apparatus is installed to operate the regulator handle on the engine, when the driver is controlling from the driver’s compartment.
The regulator handle is shown connected to a rod by means of a French pin; the other end is coupled to an operating air cylinder by means of a bell crank lever. The operating cylinder contains two pistons, one larger than the other; both are mounted on the same piston rod. The chamber between the two pistons is directly connected to an auxiliary reservoir, to which air pressure is supplied through a back pressure valve, so that a sufficient air pressure is always available. The underside of the large piston can be put in communication with the main reservoir or the atmosphere under the control of the driver’s compressed air valve. When air pressure is supplied to the underside of the large piston it is placed in equilibrium, and the air pressure from the auxiliary reservoir then forces up the small piston, and opens the regulator. When the air pressure on the underside of the large piston is destroyed, by opening the driver’s compressed-air valve to atmosphere and closing the air supply from the main reservoir, the air pressure from the auxiliary reservoir forces down the large piston and shuts the regulator. By manipulating the driver’s compressed air valve any desired opening of the regulator may be obtained. … Movement of the regulator on the engine is repeated to the driver by an electrical indicator fixed over the look-out window in the driver’s compartment. The vacuum and pressure gauges are placed on each side of the electrical indicator in the driver’s compartment, above the observation window. A pneumatic whistle is provided to give warning on the road.
A special feature of this train is the driver’s ‘safeguard’ in the event of the driver becoming incapacitated when driving alone from the rear. If he releases his hold of the brake handle in this condition it will act as an ’emergency handle’, immediately shutting the regulator and applying the brake.” [1: p129]
Following the 1923 grouping, the London Midland & Scottish Railway (LMS) became responsible for this fleet of push-pull fitted 2-4-2T and 0-6-2T Locomotives. The LMS took the decision to adopt the Midland Railway’s vacuum-worked push-pull equipment instead of the LNWR system.
As we have already noted, withdrawals of the 2-4-2T locos started as early as 1905: 118 had gone before the 1923 grouping, 90 were passed to the LMS. “They were allocated power class 1P, and assigned the numbers 6515–6600 and 6758–6761; although only 37 survived long enough to receive them: withdrawals restarted in 1924, and when the last was withdrawn in June 1936, the class became extinct. None were preserved.” [5]
In all, 65 of the ‘Coal Tanks’ (0-6-2Ts) received the LMS vacuum-worked push-pull fittings, “12 of them formerly having had the mechanical type. … The use of push-pull equipped ‘Coal Tanks’ was long-lived with the last one running on the Bangor to Bethesda branch as late as 1951.” [2]
References
‘Reversible’ Steam Train, London & North Western Railway; in The Railway Magazine, London, August 1922, p128-129.